JP7374788B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, which are examples of gaming machines, include electronic components such as display means such as a liquid crystal display and light emitting means such as LEDs (light emitting diodes).

This type of gaming machine is, for example, equipped with a game board and a display device placed away from the game board on the back side, and an opaque frame member is provided between the game board and the display device. There is a game machine that prevents the inside of the game machine from being exposed through a gap formed between the back surface of the board and the display section of the display device (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-296205

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in order to avoid spoiling the appearance of the gaming machine due to electronic components such as display means and light emitting means becoming visible to the player, these electronic components are mounted on a frame member. Although it is necessary to provide the electronic components inside the gaming machine where they cannot be seen by the player, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in design cannot be increased because the placement position of the electronic components is restricted.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design without impairing the appearance of the gaming machine due to electronic components.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player ,
An operation means that can be operated by a player ;
A production control means capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled,
A specific performance can be executed after starting the reach performance,
The operating means is operated at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed, and a second timing before the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed. It is possible to perform a predetermined vibration production that vibrates,
It is possible to execute a special vibration performance in which the operating means is vibrated during a specific performance period that is an execution period of the specific performance,
The special vibration performance can be performed at a third timing during the specific performance period and at a fourth timing after the third timing during the specific performance period,
As the special vibration performance,
A first special vibration performance that corresponds to the operation of a performance movable body different from the operation means can be executed during the specific performance period,
A second special vibration performance corresponding to the image display can be executed during the specific performance period,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
The predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance include a first performance mode and a second performance mode as common performance modes,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the first timing, the rate at which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher when it is executed in the second effect mode than when it is executed in the first effect mode. is high;
When the special vibration effect is executed at the third timing, the rate at which the special vibration effect is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher when executed in the second effect mode than when executed in the first effect mode. is high;
It is more advantageous when the predetermined vibration effect is executed in the first effect mode at the first timing than when the special vibration effect is executed in the second effect mode at the third timing. It is highly controlled by the state;
The performance mode of the special vibration performance is a performance mode different from the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and includes a specific performance mode in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is a specific ratio,
The ratio at which each of the presentation mode when the special vibration presentation is executed at the third timing and the presentation mode when the special vibration presentation is executed at the fourth timing is controlled to the advantageous state. Even if is a performance mode lower than the specific ratio, if the combination of each performance mode is a specific combination, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state becomes the specific ratio,
The predetermined vibration performance and the first special vibration performance are different in form ,
The predetermined vibration performance and the second special vibration performance are different in form ,
The first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance have different aspects ,
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
Predetermined electronic parts (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12),
The predetermined member has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component,
moreover,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
The vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates includes a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, based on vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern). Vibration performance execution means (for example, the variable display performance in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) a production control CPU 120 that executes processing, etc.);
A light emitting effect executing means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light according to the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern). (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display production process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit production control pattern determined by the above);
Specific performance execution means (for example, based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display processing in step S172),
When the predetermined vibration presentation is executed than when the predetermined vibration presentation is not executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation section presentation pattern, etc.);
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern). Jackpot reliability depending on the purpose of the operation part performance pattern),
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of the vibration performance during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and is configured to perform vibration between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. Different aspects (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, as for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to improve the game's interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a technique for providing a vibrating means in a ball firing handle in a gaming machine, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-38019. However, in such gaming machines, there is room for improvement in improving the entertainment of the performance using vibrations, and in view of this, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment of the game when performing performances using vibrations. ing.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
The vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates includes a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, based on vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern). Vibration performance execution means (for example, the variable display performance in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) a production control CPU 120 that executes processing, etc.);
A light emitting effect executing means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light according to the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern). (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display production process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit production control pattern determined by the above);
Specific performance execution means (for example, based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display processing in step S172),
When the predetermined vibration presentation is executed than when the predetermined vibration presentation is not executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation section presentation pattern, etc.);
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern). Jackpot reliability depending on the purpose of the operation part production pattern),
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of the vibration performance during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and is capable of performing vibration between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. The modes are different (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control board concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the storage area concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining moving image data and text display process tables related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display process table regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of text display control regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display setting information regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing effect drawing commands related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect drawing synthesis process related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of image processing related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of an image display regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and drawing processing pattern regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure showing the production execution period concerning feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. It is a front view showing a light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts in (B). (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit as viewed diagonally from the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in Figure 10-7(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in Figure 10-7(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E- in Figure 10-7(A). It is an E sectional view. (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. 10-11(B) is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B). FIG. (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for comparing the first performance unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for explaining similar colors. (A) is a front view showing the second production unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second production unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second presentation unit. (A) is a front view showing a third performance unit and a fourth performance unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. 10-20 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. It is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility situation of the 3rd production unit and the 4th production unit. It is a figure showing composition of a 3rd production unit and a 4th production unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located in the production position. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting regarding a setting suggestion production execution determination table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine concerning feature part 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine related to the feature section 10SH. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of vibration performance and jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production and a line-of-sight guidance production, and a production period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a presentation device regarding characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting when performing an operation part production pattern and a specific interlocking production. It is a figure showing the setting contents of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of an effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a performance control pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a timing at which an operation section effect can be executed. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a diagram showing an example of execution of an effect that causes a game effect lamp to emit light. It is a diagram showing an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of music reproduction execution.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic parts become less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
Predetermined electronic parts (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or 2,
Comprising a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic components are located away from the display means that attracts the attention of the player, so that they are less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
A protruding portion (e.g., protruding portion 3A) provided above the electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side than the electronic component;
The protrusion is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the protrusion and becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine described in Form 4,
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 601, 801) are dark colored (e.g., black) (modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion, making it less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The specific member is characterized in that the brightness or saturation of the color is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, since the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, it is possible to make the electronic component relatively less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that has at least some aspects in common with the circuit pattern (e.g., printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. (See Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine described in Form 7 or 8,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a predetermined area (e.g., rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) of the transparent member is provided in the predetermined area (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the light-transmitting member are different members.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (e.g., decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (See Figure 10-19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by the player, the boundaries between the electronic components and specific components are obscured by the decorative parts, making the electronic components less noticeable, which increases the degree of freedom in design. can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative parts are larger in number than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative parts, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 402) has a boundary corresponding area corresponding to the boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The light transmittance of the boundary corresponding area is lower than the light transmittance of the boundary non-corresponding area.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 11 or 12,
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player focuses on the logotype and becomes less aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, second presentation LED 404A) that can cause the decoration part (for example, decoration part 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Form 14,
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted from the inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex part 410 including the decorative part 420 emits light by being emitted forward almost equally from the entire front surface of the convex part 405 and incident on the area corresponding to the convex part 410.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 801), a presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. (See Figure 10-20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the visibility of the presentation means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, making the electronic components less noticeable, increasing the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine described in Form 16,
The presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
The presentation section (e.g., the light emitting presentation section 630) provided in the presentation means (e.g., the third presentation unit 600) so as to be visible to the player is larger than the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 803) (FIG. 10). -20 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 18,
A presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided in the presentation means (for example, third presentation unit 600) so as to be visible to the player has better visibility than the color of the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803). It is characterized by being a color with a high level of color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has a light emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of emitting light toward the player (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
It further includes a specific light-transmitting member (for example, the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) that is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided at a different position from the light-transmitting member,
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) of transmitting the light that has entered the light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) is higher than that of the light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member. Lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see Figure 10-14)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the electronic components become less noticeable because the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 21,
The thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light transmittance of the light transmitting member is reduced, making the electronic components less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
The light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is similar to the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, making the electronic component less noticeable.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command specifying the time of recovery from a power outage, the performance control CPU 120 indicates, for example, that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power outage or is in the process of recovering from the power outage. , performs a screen display for notification. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation of characteristic parts regarding setting values)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown in the drawings, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting values can be changed, and a lock switch for changing the setting value changing state, which will be described later. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as winning probability (ball output rate), and an opening sensor that detects opening of a slot for a gaming machine are provided. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state (setting value confirmation state) in which a game parlor attendant or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch that can be operated by an attendant of the game hall are provided in the setting changeover main body, and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case housing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, but they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a designated door key. . Furthermore, since the lock switch requires the operation of a setting key owned by an attendant of the game parlor, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be turned on and off using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but a single key may be used for both.

A display monitor that can display set values and base values is arranged in the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case. That is, the display monitor is placed in front of the main board 11 in the board case when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is open. This is the front of the pachinko game machine 1, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is placed in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The first to fourth display parts of the display monitor are each made up of 7 segments that are made up of 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots placed at the bottom right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting up or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

A game information display section may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are arranged all together. The round display device can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy/high-base state as a time-saving state or a jackpot game state. The variable probability lamp lights up when in a variable probability state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time is being saved. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. Further, as for the setting value, the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the value becomes more advantageous for the gaming parlor side. If the ball payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the jackpot probability may be constant but the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change depending on the setting value. Good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the production control board 12 regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, and other decorations. It is sufficient if it is an integrated processor in which a circuit that can control execution of a performance using some or all of a plurality of performance devices such as LEDs for use in production, movable members for performance such as the movable body 32, etc., is integrated into one chip. . The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while some or all of the audio processing circuit 91AK133, lamp control circuit 91AK134, and motor control circuit 91AK135 are included in the production control microprocessor. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 stores in advance performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data representing display images on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 only needs to include moving image data and still image data. As still image data, for example, character image data that is sprite image data that is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is used. It's fine if it's prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, image data of arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, effect images showing people, figures, symbols, etc., and background images are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. All you have to do is stay there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that allows characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of motor drive data used for rotationally driving a drive motor that operates a movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be any nonvolatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal use state where the progress of the performance is controlled, the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for effect control. The RAM91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of the built-in register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout signal is generated as a time elapsed signal. generate a signal. The timeout signal is input to the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. Upon generation of the timeout signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the production control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM91AK124 stores various table data used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM91AK124 contains table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and table data constituting various production control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The performance control pattern includes, for example, performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, an end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the production control pattern and production control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands in which a series of transfer commands and the like to be executed by the VDP91AK132 are written in accordance with the order of image processing. The display list may include a mixture of display control commands, audio control commands, lamp control commands, and motor control commands. By controlling the progress of the performance using such a display list, it is sufficient to be able to control the electric components for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electric components for presentation. The CPU 91AK131 only needs to be able to read the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a shorter reading time than the reading time of the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU91AK131 executes a performance control process for controlling the progress of the performance using the electric components for the performance according to the program read from the ROM91AK124. The effect control processing includes, for example, fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores it, and CPU91AK131 performs various types of data temporarily stored in the RAM91AK125. Variation data read processing for reading variation data of Good too.

The VDP91AK132 determines the content of control of image display in the image display device 5 based on display control commands and register settings from the CPU91AK131. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls the variable display of decorative patterns and various types of effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor that has image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. Note that the VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor more generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction part (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing etc. according to the decoding result. For example, a group of instructions for display control included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The voice control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The lamp control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The motor control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and outputs the separated data into video data and audio data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data and text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the data to the character image renderer 91AK145 and the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing that can adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the video data, or some or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. It's okay. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the vector format character image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 performs image conversion processing to display the character image specified by the character image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert vector format text image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs image conversion processing to display the text image specified by the text image specification information in the display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP91AK132. The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with various areas such as a palette area where palette data is placed, a character buffer where character image data is stored, a text buffer where text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. It is used for preservation. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (gradation control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by the VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, polygons, etc. data), etc. Note that the frame buffer includes, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a real display area that stores display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may also be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 in the virtual display area of the frame buffer is created, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. In this way, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores display data of each effect image created by drawing processing. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank occurs. The V blank is generated at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may also be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area every time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and an image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. Display data created in the drawing process is stored in the storage area.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R, based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Furthermore, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of storing audio data not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the performance data memory 91AK123, ROM91AK124, etc., for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding the audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light emission modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP91AK132, and outputs it to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs it to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and is capable of storing various data used to control the progress of the performance.

FIG. 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the storage area for effect control depending on the storage contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided, for example, so as to be included in the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs and the like. For example, table data that is the configuration data of various tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data that configures the performance control pattern, etc. are stored in the storage area as management data. It is sufficient if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table that defines procedures for displaying production images, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. All you have to do is stay there. The image processing program may include a program that converts vector format image data to bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program that generates a bitmap text image based on text written using character codes and font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and its related data. For video data, compressed image information including reference images, predicted images, etc. is generated by compression encoding processing such as motion compensated predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files that constitute a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table performs a display control process that allows the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed in correspondence with the moving image data. The display mode of a moving image is a mode or form when a moving image is played back and displayed, including a display style and a display layout of the moving image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be still image data in which arbitrary character images representing a plurality of types of decorative designs, people, figures, symbols, etc. are described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files that constitute a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image related data including text image data and its related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates connecting the outline for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line or curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. Text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of multiple character images, and includes arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient as long as it indicates the unit of the unit in a recognizable manner. Further, the text image data may represent a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using text image data may indicate subtitles, subtitles, or other information-conveying characters. It may also indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP91AK132 executes an image processing program, so it may be stored in either the ROM91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the text image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. Note that table data and data files that constitute the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance using a moving image display, and can be played back and output as any audio as the performance progresses in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is fine as long as it is done. The audio-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Note that table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as production control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and text display process table according to the contents of the reach effect. In super reach reach performances such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to perform a performance by displaying a moving image using video data and a performance by displaying a text image using text image data. The period during which the effect by displaying the moving image is performed and the period during which the effect by displaying the text image is performed may be partly or completely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used to control display is set, for example, when displaying a text image that is a combination of a plurality of character images.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined according to the content of the reach effect, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined. be done. Among these, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the reach effect. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, there are cases where the text display process table can be determined in common even for different reach effect contents, and cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

Text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", the decision cannot be made. In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD11. Can be displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (Jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD02 is executed, and if the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Can be displayed. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to and displayed on a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows an example of the structure of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach effect of SP reach A. A configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in accordance with the production is shown. FIG. 8-4(B) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include text image designation information and text display setting information that are set in association with each other in a single text display period. The text display period specifies, for each text image to be displayed, a start time to start displaying the text image and an end time to end the display. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image in the reach effect has started, or may be specified using the elapsed time since the variable display has started. You can. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the video image, the start and end times of the text display period are determined using the elapsed time since the video image display started. It is desirable to specify. The elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display changed to the reach mode, so even if the video image is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display changed to the reach mode, The timing at which the display starts may vary. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image started, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used for displaying a text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information can be used to specify the content of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). It may be information that specifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner based on display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table only needs to be able to set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other in a text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T10. Display of a moving image starts at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image. Note that timing T08 is a timing that arrives after timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. Display. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image specification information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common to a second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. 3 text display periods are included. In this case, the first text display period has a part in common with the second text display period, and a part in common with the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a period that is partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period that is partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is common to the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. In this way, a part of the first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and a part of the second text display period may be included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

Depending on the settings in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image specification information can be displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As a second text display period included in the first text display period, a text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, text image designation information 91AKA03 or text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is applied to the display of the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification information is used to display the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is changed so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 from timing T02 to timing T03. The text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least part of the plurality of text display periods, so that the display of the text images can be improved. Components can be changed. Note that when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text image serving as the display mode may be changed in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. good. When video images using common video data are displayed, some or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You can also let In this way, it may be possible to change part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image, or it is possible to change part or all of the text image added to one moving image. You can also use it as

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA23 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. Displays the specified text image.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field allows setting of the font family, which is the font type, for the font of characters included in the text image. The fontSize field allows you to set the font size at which the text image will be displayed. The fontWeight field allows setting the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field allows setting the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field allows setting the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters included in a text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorative displays added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information allows the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to be set.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image specification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, due to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As a second text display period included in this first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a third text display period included in the first text display period is specified by text image specification information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. It may be displayed in different display layouts. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in a text display setting different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The information 91 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by AKB13. In this way, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. In addition to displaying the text image in one display mode, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. At the same time, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is first displayed. The text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of text images added to a moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from other text images. Furthermore, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, there are cases in which the text image in the second display mode is changed to a text image in the third display mode and then displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, as in the case where the text image of the mode is changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text The text image specified by the specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Further, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display. Also, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. In this case, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. Further, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Furthermore, in the plurality of text display process tables, at least some of the text image specification information and text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , some or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and second component regarding the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF using the color field. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is a second component regarding the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed depending on the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable depending on the reach effect content etc. even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, for example, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at different rates depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" or not is controlled to be in an advantageous state. may be determined, or may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Furthermore, even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information, the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, can be changed depending on the execution result of the production control program by the CPU91AK131. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 only needs to be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on display control commands from the CPU91AK131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing some of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, thereby preventing an increase in data volume and processing load. , it becomes possible to display a variety of text images. When changing the display color of a text image, other display styles may also be correspondingly changeable. For example, if the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image will be easier for the player to visually recognize, and if the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image will be difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image that is displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be good if it could be changed so that This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's discomfort when displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an example of performing an effect in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this execution example, text images are displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods along with a moving image display when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. In the reach effect of SP Reach A, a moving image is displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", and a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "loss". A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, an effect display is performed that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete, and for example, the battle result is displayed. It is sufficient that the contents of the effect display be the same until the timing of notification. In addition, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 becomes high, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a "loss", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01. becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach performance of SP Reach A, even in the video display period that is the common content of the performance display, the jackpot expectation level can be varied depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. Can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and the text image specification information 91AKA01 corresponds to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the origin coordinates (300,30), for example, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The font family is AA_gothic, which is a Gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the text image display color changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes image conversion processing to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is changed to the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by . In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the origin coordinates (250,600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponds to normal character thickness, the text image display color is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is left-justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The production execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal Components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding regular font, character arrangement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decorations as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, text styles, and text alignment have changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

The production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the text image display color is gold, corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is effect_gold, which is the effect display setting for gold display. Compared to the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Text style, text placement, and text decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by text image specification information, among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, data to be changed and data not to be changed can be individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this manner, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if you want to change and display one data among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, the first data and Other data associated in advance may also be changed and displayed. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold" and displaying it, it is only necessary to change the text decoration to the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold.

The display color and background display color of the text image are for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, when the brightness (gradation) is between "0" and "255". The level can be set in 256 steps. In text display setting information, the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field has a common data format with the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field, for example, in character display setting information used to display character images. All you have to do is stay there. Further, the coordinates of the origin when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a common data format with the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information can be shared with field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is only necessary that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using information common to a production image different from the text image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Font families that can be set when displaying text images are not set when displaying character images. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Furthermore, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontSize field corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may be different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in a production image different from the text image. Good too. Thereby, a variety of text images can be displayed by flexibly changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

For example, if a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the text decoration becomes the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold. In the text display setting information, if "gold" is set in the color field, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and to display gold around the text image. It is possible to add and display a special effect image. In the production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when the text image specification information 91A13 specifies a specific text image indicating the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 allows for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., a specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for golden display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an effect is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, by adding an effect using a text image display using text image data, it is easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect. This makes it easier to provide information that is different from the content of the performance. In this case, if the data structure is such that text image data is compressed and encoded and multiplexed as video data included in the video data, the outline of the text image will be Problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. Additionally, if different video data is prepared depending on the display content of the text image display added to the video display, the data capacity of the video data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It becomes easier. If special compression encoding processing or decompression decoding processing is performed in order to prevent deterioration of display quality in text image display, there is a risk that the processing load of image data will further increase.

The characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK add a text image display effect using text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 when a moving image display effect using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the content of the performance. In addition, since text image display effects are added using text image data stored separately from the video data, it is possible to avoid an increase in the data capacity of the video data and an increase in the processing load of the image data. , it becomes possible to control the display appropriately so that it can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information, as a first component regarding the text image, designates the display content of the text image according to the text image data. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to perform image conversion processing, etc. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one video image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first and second components related to the text image added to the first video image, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and data capacity and processing burden can be reduced. Appropriate display control becomes possible so that the increase is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. If the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In addition, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is displayed. It is possible to add and display the used text image. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added to and displayed on a plurality of mutually different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to multiple video images, it is possible to display a variety of text images easily and with high quality, while also preventing increases in data volume and processing burden. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the line "Super hot" are displayed based on the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style and the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . A text image that shows the line "Super hot" is a text image that corresponds to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of becoming a "jackpot". It only needs to be a text image. In this way, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component, such as the display mode regarding the specific text image, may be changeable at multiple timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control in a case where the display style of a text image indicating the line "Very hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no text decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042 is During the display period, the display color is gold and no text decoration is set, and during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the effect display setting is such that the text decoration is gold. The text image display style that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 is a font whose font family is DD_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font by the fontFamily field, and a font size of 72px by the fontSize field, respectively. It is set.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black, which corresponds to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting, which corresponds to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and no text decoration is set.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and no text decoration is set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed, for example, by displaying a gradation of the text image. However, if the text image display is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to effect display settings for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is set to effect display settings in gold. In addition to setting the display color of a text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to display an effect for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the outline of the text image Effect images can be added and displayed around text images using display colors such as shading and shading, border display using bevels and embossing, layer styles that add glow, and combinations of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to giving the text image a glossy appearance, by adding and displaying an effect image around the text image, it becomes easier for players to recognize the golden display, and the game It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, one part of the text image is distinguished from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in different display styles. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image with the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image called "Character" out of the text information indicating the line "If this character wins..." to display the display color and background of the text image differently from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and font style.

FIGS. 8-9 show a display example in which a portion of a text image has a display style different from that of other portions. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic text style, and the other part of the text image is displayed with a black display color. Display the background display color as white and the text style as normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image called "Character", and the color field sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, the backgroundColor field sets the background display color to black corresponding to #000000, Set the italics corresponding to the italic character style using the fontStyle field. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to other parts of the text image, with the color field setting the text image display color to black corresponding to #000000, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field setting the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF. Set the normal font corresponding to the character style normal. Thereby, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of other portions, it is possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

In displaying a text image constituting a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a display style different from other portions may be changeable in accordance with the progress of the presentation by displaying the moving image. For example, when the performance of a song or the audio playback of dialogue progresses as a video image is displayed, a part of the text image that corresponds to the progress status is displayed in a display style that is different from other parts, such as display in a specific color or highlight display. You may let them. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed as fade-in or fade-out in accordance with the progress of the performance of the music or the audio reproduction of the lines. This is not limited to the situation in which a song is played along with a video image or the audio of a line is being played, but a part of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other parts can be changed depending on the elapsed time in the execution of a given performance. It may be possible. Thereby, in displaying the text image, a portion displayed in a display style different from other portions is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, thereby making it possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Execute either one of display control that allows the display to be changed depending on the video image, and display control that allows the display of a text image added to multiple video images using common text image data. It may also be possible to do one without executing the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be arbitrary components that can be changed, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. In place of or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of a text image, it is possible to change any component related to the display of a text image. You can. For example, when moving and displaying a text image, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying enlarged or reduced text images, and the enlargement and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time. Any configuration element that can be set regarding the display of a text image may be changed as long as it is possible to change any component that can be set regarding the display of a text image, such as the time interval or amount of change for updating the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio when changing the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio.

When displaying a text image corresponding to common display content, the display mode of the text image can be changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in Figure 8-6(A). The present invention is not limited to changing the display color, but may be any display mode that can be changed such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 has origin coordinates, font family, Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be able to change a display mode different from the text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least some text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive and cursive, is multiplexed and compression encoded as part of the video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display a text image in a specific manner by decoding it or the like. In this case, data regarding a text image in a specific manner is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the data related to text images includes specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. You can.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may also be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 using text image specification information, read out the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 without using font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize.

The scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only with data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or with, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to text images, such as word font data, which is not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be prepared. If only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in display effects is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data becomes easy, so designing effects for displaying text images is possible. The burden can be reduced, and when a large amount of text images are used in display effects, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As a second component related to a text image, a specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to a text image showing the line "Super hot". , any text image that is preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group may be used. For example, among the plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as the specific text image. In this way, for a specific text image that corresponds to an audio production or a display production whose content changes depending on the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image, the second component such as the display mode can be set in multiple ways. It may be possible to change the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display where the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display where the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be a specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to a text image of display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot", but a text image of display content that suggests that the probability of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot gaming state, but may include special gaming states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit of the number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") which is greater than the second round number (for example, "7"), and that it can be performed in the time-saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (e.g., "100") that is higher than the second number (e.g., "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is higher than the second probability (e.g., 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chances (for example, "5"). It may also include a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10") resulting in a more advantageous gaming situation for the player.

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold, which corresponds to "gold"; for example, it may be silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any other color different from metallic colors. This may include a case where the display color is set. The present invention is not limited to the display color of the text image, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings should be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added and displayed around the text image. Bye.

When displaying a text image as a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as intra-character coordinates or display time when displaying the text image. For example, if the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the display color can be changed to a different display color for each character coordinate of the text image. , it would be good if rainbow display were possible. For example, for the coordinates in the character 1, depending on the elapsed time, the display color changes from red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then from bluish-purple to reddish-purple. You can change multiple display colors one after another. At this time, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted and each The display color of the coordinates within the text may be changed in the following order: red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, blue-violet, and red-violet. After red-purple, you can change the display color by returning to red again. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" using the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image. Note that by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow manner. Alternatively, by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this way, a text image may be displayed in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether or not a specific movement of the player is detected, or multiple components may be changed at different rates. It may be possible to change either one. The specific actions of the player that enable the first component and the second component related to the text image to be changed include, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, and other operations such as a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary action of tilting the button 31b, or it may be an action of pressing down the push button 31b. The player's movements are not limited to those that can be detected, but are based on the detection results of any changes or differences in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control on the detection target, or changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target. In addition, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable. Detection devices capable of detecting movements, changes, differences, etc. in a detection target, such as infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, CCD sensors, and CMOS sensors, can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically, Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of a mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effect by displaying a text image using text image data may be executed as a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to these determination ratio settings, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the rate at which the effect by text image display according to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. is made different depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is easy to perform an effect by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is easily executed. The ratio of performance based on image display increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" and the effect by text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player. The expectation level, which is a set value, increases.

In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion performance may be made executable at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in a range where the setting value is the specific setting value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value, and is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, within a range where the setting value is a specific setting value, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, when it is a special period, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than when it is a period other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of setting suggestion effects is lower in a range that is a period other than the special period than in a range that is a special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate during a special period, but is not executed during a period other than the special period. In this way, within the special period, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed within a period other than the special period.

The present invention is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is met, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not met. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower in a range where the special condition is not met than in a range where the special condition is met. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that becomes executable at a predetermined rate when a special condition is met, but is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion performance is not executed in a range where the special condition is not satisfied. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of the judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance or the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be any condition that can be established depending on the judgment or decision. Not limited to setting suggestion effects, any effect may be one that can be executed at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met or not. The production mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. . In addition, a restriction may be set for an arbitrary performance such that a specific performance is not executed within a range where a preset restriction condition is met, or compared to a range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. A limit may be set such that the execution rate decreases and it is difficult to execute.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means is capable of changing the second component regarding the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. Good too. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control display so as to prevent increases in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to display an effect image added to the surrounding area. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, etc. , it is possible to add and display character images using data related to common character images. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means controls the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to one moving image. The second component may be changeable. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control display so as to prevent increases in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to display an effect image added to the surrounding area. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK may be combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic part 60AK as appropriate. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect in a suggestion effect mode, and in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, or a character image using data regarding a common character image may be created for the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. It may be possible to add and display it.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of a screen display in the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 01AKA1, a first pending display area 01AKB1, a second pending display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display area 01AKB1, a pending display is performed in accordance with the first pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In the second pending display area 01AKB2, a pending display is performed in accordance with the second pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this way, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first pending display area 01AKB1, and the second pending display area 01AKB2, active display and pending display, which are specific displays, are possible based on information regarding variable display. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as a "first hold display," and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as a "second hold display."

For example, the first hold display area 01AKB1 can display holds that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the first hold display is aligned to the right. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold displays can be displayed that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the second hold display is aligned to the left. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display corresponding to the first pending display that was erased (digested) in the first pending display area 01AKB1 in response to the start of the first special figure game is started, and the second special figure game is started. In response to the start, an active display is started in accordance with the second pending display that was erased (expired) in the second pending display area 01AKB2. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may be one that has the same color and pattern as the first pending display and the second pending display.For example, the active display may be common to the first pending display and the second pending display. The effect image may be displayed larger than each pending display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first pending display or the second pending display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display, so that the active display can be distinguished from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The performance image showing the small design is smaller than the identification information image which is the performance image showing the decorative design, and can be displayed variably in a manner that is partially or completely common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative design. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing a decorative pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the production image showing a small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decorative pattern. Since it is an image showing the numbers given and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, by displaying the small symbols in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misrecognizing the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols serving as reduced identification information is performed, and a determined small symbol serving as a display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command that instructs color blending to invert color information. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by changing magnification. Command 01AKG04 is a drawing command that commands color blending for monochrome conversion. Command 01AKG05 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command that instructs to change the offset amount of the image position.

The effect drawing command may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for controlling drawing, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string that is a combination of a plurality of commands for the VDP91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order of description in the display list. The effect drawing command may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command that commands color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal registers of the VDP91AK132 store control data that specifies calculation targets included in the display list, numerical data that specifies parameters, and other register values, and by storing register values according to execution commands, Drawing according to the display list starts.

When performing color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated by texture mapping using bilinear interpolation on image data, for example. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images thus generated, a combined reduced image is generated by performing a color blending process such as alpha blending. Thereafter, by executing an enlargement process on the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is blurred.

When executing color blending to invert color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, are set. Execute the difference calculation process. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80=175. By performing the same difference calculation process for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information contained in the image data is You can change the image and draw the generated image.

When executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification in response to command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. Using the multiple enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image corresponding to the original image data (original image), blur processing is performed by performing color blending processing such as alpha blending. The generated image can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image becomes the same.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, for example, execute monochrome conversion calculation processing for each pixel on RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in image data. do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting RGB values into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. In this manner, by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is subjected to monochrome conversion.

When performing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, two types of rotated images are generated for an image with a rotation angle of 0 degrees, an image with a rotation angle of 2 degrees, and an image with a rotation angle of 4 degrees. Using the multiple rotated images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to create a blurred image. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the image position information is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing on the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information, such as UV coordinate values, when drawing an image is changed in accordance with an offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the texture arrangement is different.

In this way, the effect drawing commands may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that change the color information included in the image data and enable drawing of the generated image. Furthermore, the effect drawing commands may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing position information corresponding to image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that changes arbitrary attribute information regarding image data to enable drawing of the generated image.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing a composition process using color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among these, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer with the highest display priority, and displays an effect image showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL1, and renders an effect image corresponding to pending display or active display so as to be displayable. Further, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL3 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL2, and displays an effect image used for a chance-up effect that increases the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays performance images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Draw as possible. Layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image, etc., which becomes a background image, so that it can be displayed.

The display layer on which the plurality of effect images are arranged is specified, for example, by display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5 is specified as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on each display layer are specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. Good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing the respective effect images in a superimposed manner. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be a different value depending on the layer to be drawn. For example, a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned is placed closer (front side) in the Z-axis direction than a display layer to which a larger Z value is assigned, and has a higher image display priority. Just do it like this.

When the VDP91AK132 writes image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to a frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like, the display priority can be determined by performing a Z value comparison operation. At this time, for example, image data of a performance image with a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over image data of a performance image with a large Z value. As a result, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned, and from the player's perspective. It can be placed on the near side (front side). On the other hand, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned will have a lower display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned, and the player will It can be placed on the back side (rear side). Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be an inverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value has a higher Z value than a display layer to which a smaller value is assigned as a Z value. It may be arranged on the near side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the display image 01AKD1 including a plurality of effect images is generated by executing the rendering process of the effect image according to the display layer. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are combined in a superimposed manner as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Among layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed using a different drawing process from the effect images drawn in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect drawing synthesis process executed by the VDP91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the result of decoding an instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing synthesis process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be processed is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and stored in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM91AK147. Just remember it. The image data to be subjected to the effect processing is specified by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 among the plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed in accordance with the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP91AK132 uses some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 to execute inter-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, so that, for example, any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 All you have to do is perform color blending accordingly. In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be executed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, images are combined and drawn in correspondence with the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending was performed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP91AK132 draws on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command using some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. The images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. As a result, images drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing effect color blending. can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn in accordance with the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be drawn is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and drawn in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. An image in a low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses it for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. All you have to do is transfer it to the frame buffer and store it. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is designated by a drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers. As a result, images drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn for screen display without executing color blending for effects and without changing the color information of the image data. Can be done.

In this way, the VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using the image data stored in the predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK123 and the VRAM91AK147. Furthermore, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information included in the image data and draw the image to be drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. On the other hand, an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn in accordance with image data.

When a display list that does not include effect drawing commands but includes normal display drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can execute normal drawing synthesis processing that is different from effect drawing synthesis processing. In normal drawing synthesis processing, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the VRAM91AK147. The data may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, has the color information of the image data changed without executing color blending for effects. It can be drawn for screen display without having to do so.

FIG. 9-5 shows an example of execution of image processing using effect drawing and synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list including effect drawing commands, among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL3, the layer Image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL4 and image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL5 are respectively specified. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing and synthesis process, it stores them in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 and temporarily stores them. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL4, and the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5, Image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing and synthesis process. For example, when a color blend for monochrome conversion is specified by command 01AKG04 as an effect drawing command, color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

Thereafter, the VDP 91AK132 synthesizes images corresponding to the low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order of display layer having the lowest display priority. At this time, it is sufficient to overwrite the image data or erase hidden surfaces depending on the display priority. Among the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Let me remember it. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is read out second, and is written superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, and is written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes images corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis process. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, image data 01AKD02 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL2 among layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer is specified first as the image data to be drawn. , image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in layer 01AKL1 is specified next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads these image data, it writes and stores them in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL2 is read out first, and is superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out and written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted to image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 with color information changed by effect color blending, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 is given priority for display. are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the time. Thereafter, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing effect color blending. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn using a specific drawing process such as color blending for effects, and display various effects images such as a background image, a effects image showing a decorative pattern, and an effect image that increases chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are drawn using normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, and are used to create effect images that show pending display or active display, effect images that show small symbols, etc. Related predetermined images can be displayed.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of an image displayed by executing the effect drawing synthesis process. When a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing effect drawing synthesis processing. .

FIG. 9-6(A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, a production image drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing etc. from the effect color blend is displayed. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed using monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., in which drawing is performed using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. Images for presentation can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without changing the color information included in the image data.

FIG. 9-6(B) shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as an effect drawing command, it is possible to display a production image drawn by difference calculation processing among effect color blends in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is. Difference calculation processing is processing for converting and rendering the value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as a specific drawing process, drawing is performed by a difference calculation process that converts the value of color information included in the image data and draws the image for presentation. can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without converting the values of color information included in the image data.

In addition, when a display list including command 01AKG01 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, use a composition process that performs color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, as a specific drawing process, the image data is It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are converted into image data by a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring by rotation as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn with the included color information changed. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, the image data is converted as a specific drawing process by coordinate value conversion processing that changes the offset amount of the image position. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data through normal drawing processing.

By using these effect drawing commands, you can draw a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data, or a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. This makes it possible to perform different image processing depending on the effect drawing command, even for production images that are drawn using common image data, so that color information or position information can be changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the contents of the reach effect. The jackpot reliability for each reach performance is the ratio of cases in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state among the cases in which each reach performance is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different depending on the reach effect that is a plurality of types of super reach, such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set to differ depending on multiple types of reach effects by assigning a determination value that is compared with the random value for determining the variable display pattern. All you have to do is stay there.

SP Reach A1 to A3 are super reach effects with lower jackpot reliability than SP Reach B, and are also referred to as "weak SP reach." SP Reach B is a super reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach A1 to A3, and is also called "Strong SP Reach." For example, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP Reach B is 80%. It is. Therefore, when the SP reach A1 reach effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" only about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach performance content may include a performance mode in which some commonality can be recognized. For example, a common moving image may be played back and displayed as a background image for SP reach A1 to A3. Alternatively, a common character image may be displayed as an animation for SP reach A1 to A3. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode that makes it possible to recognize the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, for SP Reach B, a moving image different from that for SP Reach A1 to A3 may be played back and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP Reach B, a character image different from that in SP Reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode in which one of SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized as different from other cases. For example, different moving images may be played back and displayed as background images for SP reach A1 to A3. Alternatively, character images different from each other may be displayed as animations in SP reaches A1 to A3. Other presentation modes that can be used to recognize differences include arbitrary displays on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary displays using light emitting members such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. Any movement using a movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these may be used.

When a super reach effect such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a case where a drawing effect is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects that can display images drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display an image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if it includes a case where an effect is executed by displaying an image drawn only in response to a normal display drawing command without executing a specific drawing effect. good.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of setting the drawing effect contents according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Depending on the plurality of drawing effect patterns, some or all of the drawing effect contents are different. The content of the drawing effect includes the presence or absence and type of the drawing effect by effect display, and the presence or absence of the drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also referred to as a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is also referred to as a specific drawing effect.

The effect display is an effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a monochrome-converted effect image. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 of the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image with color information inverted. In this way, the effect display may be performed as long as it can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. Note that the effect display may be capable of displaying an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data using, for example, command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands.

A strobe display is an effect display that alternately and repeatedly displays an image drawn using image data and a single-color image (for example, black or white) with settings different from the image data, every predetermined number of frames. It is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, while strobe display can be executed within the range of images drawn on a specific layer, a limit may be set such that strobe display cannot be executed within the range of images drawn on a special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image has been temporarily stopped by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. Note that when strobe display is not performed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process processing in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, multiple drawings are performed at a rate according to the variable display result and the content of the reach effect as shown in FIG. 9-8. It is sufficient if one of the performance patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach is specified, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random value, depending on the variable display result and the content of the reach effect, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Figure 9-8, if the variable display result is "Lose" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it will be drawn at a rate of 60% (=60/100). The rendering effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the rendering effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=5/100). /100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined, and at a rate of 5% (5/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined. be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the rate of 20% (=20/100) The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such determination ratios, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state is different between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing specific drawing effects using one or both of effect display and strobe display. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is more effective than when the variable display result is a "loss". The proportion of drawing performance patterns other than those determined is high. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when a specific drawing effect is executed, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, the content is higher than when the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In addition, the determination ratio of the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, only drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is set so that drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is not determined. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, a super reach effect is executed, which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than when it is SP reach A1 to A3. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, it will be difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of super reach, which has a high probability of hitting the jackpot, and this may reduce the player's enjoyment of the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, a limit is set in which a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being obstructed from the player's attention to the super reach performance with high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game's interest.

When the reach effect content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different rates depending on the variable display result. . When the reach performance content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach B. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In this way, when the reach performance content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, the specific drawing performance is executed and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state increases, so the super reach with low jackpot reliability Even if the game is a reach effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect can increase the player's expectations and appropriately improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing presentation pattern other than 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that specific drawing effects using effect display and strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. Restrictions may be set as follows.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows the performance execution period in the variable display of super reach. When the super reach variable display is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of performance execution periods such as performance execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display until the execution of the ready-to-win effect is started after the ready-to-win effect is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-reach performance execution period in which the super reach performance is executed until the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance up performance execution period to the end of the chance up performance execution period until the start of the result notification performance execution period in which the result notification performance can be executed. The result notification performance may be any performance that notifies a performance result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in a reach performance that becomes a super reach. The performance execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification performance execution period. The performance execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification performance execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows performance control example 02AKC01 in each performance execution period. Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, if the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is executed. become executable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, so even in the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable.

Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the super reach reach performance, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. For example, in the production execution period D0, if it is possible to perform a light emission production using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the BGM and sound effect output when the variable display of decorative symbols starts. good. In addition, during the performance execution period D0, decorative symbols may be stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and ” When the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous eye are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are activated in response to the BGM and sound effect output. It may also be possible to perform a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. It may be possible to perform the performance.

Among the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which the super reach reach performance etc. are executed during the execution of the variable display, in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0, the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01 is selected. Regardless of whether this is the case, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. In the performance execution period D2 which is after the performance execution period D1, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. In the specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, it is possible to display images drawn by specific drawing processing, for example, in specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5. Note that even when a specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 is executed, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing, for example.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR is performed, regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. becomes executable. In addition, in the effect execution period D3, similarly to the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is other than 02AKA01. It may be. If the specific drawing effect SPE is made executable in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is changed to normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying the finalized decorative pattern etc. that will be a variable display result. What is necessary is to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be made executable during all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of super reach is executed, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the determination result that the reach effect of super reach will be executed as a judgment result at the time of starting winning. You can do it like this. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, in the same way as when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2, for example, in the specific layer 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, It is sufficient if it is possible to display images drawn by specific drawing processing, and for example, in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, images drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed.

Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emitting performance using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is performed. It is doable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the light emission effect is controlled not to be executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect may be prevented from being executed by turning off the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9. On the other hand, when a specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing is executed, a light emission effect by a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute the light emission effect by emitting light from the light emitting member, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is In the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying is executed, a restriction is set as a limit that the light emission performance by light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When a specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing a light emitting effect, an appropriate image that allows the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process is created. The display can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 etc., the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emission effect by light emission of the light emitting member, for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. Restrictions may be placed on the presentation mode of the light emitting effect, such as reducing the amount of light emitting effect compared to when the light emitting effect is used. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, a restriction is applied to reduce the amount of effect by lowering the amount of light emitted from the light emitting member (brightness) in the light emitting effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the number of light-emitting members that can emit light in the light emission effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the luminous color used in the light emitting effect (for example, monochrome light emission) than when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Limits may be set as follows.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show examples of execution of reach effects and drawing effects. FIG. 9-10 shows an example of execution of an effect when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among cases where a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an example of production execution 02AKM01 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. At this time, a reach is established when the common decorative symbols corresponding to the number "7" are all stopped and displayed (temporary stopped display) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. , the normal reach reach effect is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed as appropriate in response to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is only necessary that it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the reach establishment to the super reach development.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows a performance execution example 02AKM02 in a case where the normal reach performance becomes a reach development in which the reach performance shifts to the super reach performance in response to the start of the performance execution period D1. 9-10(C) and FIG. 9-10(D) show performance execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the reach performance of super reach progresses in the performance execution period D1. In the case of production execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, it is possible to perform the normal drawing production NOR with the light emission production regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM05 when the chance-up performance during reach is executed in the performance execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows performance execution example 02AKM06 when a reach performance is executed after the chance up performance in the performance execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR with the light emission effect based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed in response to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification performance is executed during the performance execution period D3. At this time, as a super reach effect, a reach effect with different effect contents depending on the variable display result is executed, and also in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the finalized decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by oscillating display or the like. In the case of production execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the production execution period D3, the normal drawing production NOR with light emission production can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production SPE can be executed. Not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows an example of performance execution 02AKM08 when the final notification of the variable display result is executed during the performance execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of super reach ends, the determined decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed. In the case of production execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the production execution period D4, it is possible to execute the normal drawing production NOR accompanied by the light emission production regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and to execute the specific drawing production SPE. Not executed.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM11 when a chance-up performance during reach is executed in response to the start of the performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE using strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM12 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of production execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM12, an effect display that becomes a pause display during strobe display is executed. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient if the pause display can be executed during strobe display by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing an image read from the copy area of the VRAM91AK147, the same image as in the production execution example 02AKM11 may be temporarily stopped and repeatedly displayed.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM13, images similar to effect execution example 02AKM12 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(E) shows effect execution example 02AKM15 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM14, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM16 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM15, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows effect execution example 02AKM17 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM16, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM18 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM17, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, it is possible to perform pause display as well as strobe display. . After the strobe display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the execution returns to the normal drawing effect NOR, and control is performed to execute the light emission effect.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image with settings different from the image data, in response to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a strobe display in response to a drawing command, the normal drawing effect NOR is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest.

FIG. 9-12 (A) shows that when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02 AKB02 is executed. This shows a production execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM22 in which a strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM22, similarly to performance execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows. In the case of production execution example 02AKM23, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance-up production during reach that was started in production execution example 02AKM21. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the monochrome conversion effect, even when strobe display is executed, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM23, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-12(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM25 in the case where, following performance execution example 02AKM24, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM27 in which a ready-to-win performance after the performance execution example 02AKM25 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following the performance execution example 02AKM26. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or a temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM27, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, a monochrome-converted image drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information through monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect in addition to strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses a dedicated image using an image drawn with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of data. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect according to the effect drawing command, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impression given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and while preventing the amount of image data from increasing, the display effect It is possible to enhance the impression of the player and improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-13(A) shows a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect execution example 02AKM31 is shown. In comparison with the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM32 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-13 (C) is an example of performance execution in which, following performance execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the reach chance up effect. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM33, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance up performance during reach that was started in performance execution example 02AKM31. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the color information inversion effect, even when a strobe display is executed, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time. , the temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM33, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-13(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM35 in which, following performance execution example 02AKM34, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. Compared to the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image rendered by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM36, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM37 when a ready-to-win performance after performance execution example 02AKM35 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following performance execution example 02AKM36. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. Note that the temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or the temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM38, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, an image with inverted color information, which is drawn by converting color information values through differential calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to perform a strobe display and a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect.

The effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, uses dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the color information included in the image data in accordance with the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of the situation. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect in response to an effect drawing command, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impressions given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color changes in the displayed image. It is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the interest in the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort due to the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than when it is SP reach B. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectation can be increased and the game interest can be appropriately improved.

The invention regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features regarding the feature parts 01AK and 02AK, but may have the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the conventional technology. It may also include a part of it.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that becomes a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state, rather than when a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

The description has been made assuming that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emission effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the near side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, a light-emitting member such as a light-guide plate LED is provided near the light-guide plate, and light from the light-emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light-guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light-guide plate. In this case, a light emitting display effect that displays a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. In the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing performance pattern, it is sufficient if the light emission display performance can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display performance pattern. On the other hand, in response to a drawing effect pattern or the like, the light emitting display effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting section mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, it is only necessary that the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emitting effect pattern, etc. during the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern. On the other hand, the button light emission effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the layer 01AKL2, which displays and renders an effect image corresponding to a pending display or an active display, may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In the setting where layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the pending display or active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, so that color information etc. may be changed. When a specific drawing performance SPE using a monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is only necessary that the performance image corresponding to the pending display or active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While it is possible to display such monochrome display of pending display and active display, if it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of specific display related to variable display such as pending display and active display, specific drawing effect SPE If a change effect is executed during the execution of , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state. If the change performance includes a success pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display, the change performance of the successful pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, When the display color of the specific display changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the pending display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like indicating the direction in which the game ball is launched can be displayed. For example, in the direction display layer, when a firing promotion performance is executed as an operation promotion performance for a left-handed performance or a right-handed performance, a performance image that urges the game ball to be fired towards the left side game area or the right side game area is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, games can be played by firing game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first route may be a right-handed route that becomes the right-hand game area in the gaming area, and the second route may be a left-handed area that becomes the left-hand game area in the game area. Then, when the first state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, a first promotion image that urges the game medium to be launched toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. That's fine. In addition, when the second state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the second path, a second promotion image is displayed that urges the game medium to be launched toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, whereas the direction display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side game area or the right side game area may be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display images that prompt the firing of game media using normal rendering processing rather than specific rendering processing, a variety of display effects can be performed while ensuring appropriate visibility of the images that prompt the firing of gaming media. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, it may be possible to draw and display an effect image that shows a changeable effect output amount, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect is drawn in a displayable manner.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a warning display layer that displays a warning image or the like to notify the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the warning display layer, detection is performed by various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a big winning opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. If it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the state of detection of game balls by the start port switch, count switch, etc., a warning image will be drawn and displayed according to the error that has occurred. Good if possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the warning display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be displayed as a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality while providing a variety of display effects. By doing so, you can increase your enjoyment of the game. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormality light emission notification may be performed by causing the light emitting member to emit light even during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emission effect is executed. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be performed with higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that displays a presentation image in a setting suggestion presentation may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer only needs to be able to draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting value, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute or not to perform the performance depending on the setting value. It is sufficient if it is possible to execute setting suggestion performances with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggestion images at different rates depending on the setting value, and to draw and display the selected setting suggestion image on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the suggestion display layer is The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 on a special layer using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to display images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. It is possible to perform a variety of display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility, thereby improving the interest in the game. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, during the performance execution period when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the special layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process, whereas the suggestion display layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by specific drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer using specific drawing processing, it is possible to diversify the display of images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

At least some of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the navigation notification that notifies the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result to the assist time (also referred to as AT), which is the executable notification period. As the navigation notification, an effect image that informs the stopping order in a recognizable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that displays an effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, if you want to notify the order in which to stop the variable display by each reel on the left center right, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image showing the order of stop operations using the stop switch on the notification display layer. good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing, whereas the notification display layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. The visibility of the image that informs the operation mode when stopping the variable display in a slot machine can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing. It is possible to improve the game's interest by performing various display performances while appropriately ensuring the following.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
This embodiment includes the following inventions. In other words, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can execute a game, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, an effect image can be displayed based on instructions from a display list. Techniques for making it possible to display images by tilting them, and techniques for gaming machines that draw processed images in which a plurality of deformed images generated using inverted images are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2012-29947, etc. was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there was a risk that the visibility of important images would be reduced because the entire image was changed. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment while ensuring appropriate image visibility.
The gaming machine related to the feature section 01AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. An image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to a normal display drawing command, which draws in accordance with image data, and At least, it is possible to perform specific drawing processing such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing processing that changes color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command. Images in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers such as layers AKL01 and AKL02 that have a higher priority than the specific layers, for example. With steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, it is possible to display an image for effect by drawing with a specific drawing process in a specific layer, and for example, with step 01AKS04, with a special layer, it is possible to draw with a normal drawing process and display images related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data (for example, color information inversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, there is a first period (for example, production execution period D1, etc.) in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as production execution period D1, and a second period in which specific drawing processing is executed, such as production execution period D2. Among a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the performance execution period D2, etc.), the light emitting means may be allowed to emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means may not be emitted during the second period. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, a first period (such as a performance execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as a performance execution period D1, and a second period (for example, a performance execution period D2) during which a specific drawing process is executed, such as a performance execution period D2. etc.), in the first period it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a normal manner, and in the second period, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal manner. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. It is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, settings such as effects according to effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (for example, the effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and an image drawn by specific drawing processing may not be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestive effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. The system is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion such as an effect using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to execute a performance (for example, a performance using the performance execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and it may be possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process as an image displayed by the setting suggestion performance. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific rendering effect that temporarily stops and displays an image, such as a specific rendering effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 (for example, a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochromatic image in a specific layer (for example, see effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in 5R), and reduction in a mode that is smaller than the identification information image, such as the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1. It is possible to perform variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 01AKC1), and for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed using a specific drawing process. Yes, the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 and a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. It is equipped with an image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and is equipped with a specific performance such as a super reach performance that suggests control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the performance patterns of the specific performance are a first pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, for example, and a second pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, which have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state. Among the performance periods in which the specific performance is executed, at least during the first period, such as the performance execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing performance. It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to the drawing command of In the second period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, and to display a specific drawing process such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing performance, for example, in the case of the second pattern. It is possible to display images drawn by . As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, appropriately raise the player's expectations, and improve his/her interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may be performed by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information inversion, for example. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02 AKC01, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting means in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific effect, and in response to displaying an image drawn by a specific drawing process in a specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emitting effect may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific production, it is possible to execute a light emission production by the light emitting means in a normal mode, and in response to displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing in a specific production, The light emitting effect may be more limited than in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. You may also choose not to display the image. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, and the setting means is provided. It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. It may also be possible to display images. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image in the case of the second pattern, as in the production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to variably display a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image.For example, as shown in Figure 9-5, the identification information image is The reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, in a configuration in which an operation performance to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion performance that is an operation performance in a suggestion performance mode, in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed, or a character image using data regarding a common character image is added to the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. In a configuration in which images can be displayed using a specific layer, a special layer can be drawn using a specific drawing process to display an effect image, and a special layer with a higher priority than the specific layer may be drawn using a normal drawing process. It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in a second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by specific drawing processing when the second pattern has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first pattern.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 having the feature section 75SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine as the feature part 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is assumed to be the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is assumed to be the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, right and left directions as seen from the player located in front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Furthermore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 includes a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that supports and fixes the game board 2. (also referred to as underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has obstacle nails (not shown) on the front surface of the game board. , a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, etc. are provided, and a spacer member 201 is integrally attached to the back side of the board 200. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

An opening 2c is formed in the board 200 and spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side can be viewed from the player's side through the opening 2c. It can be viewed from the front side. Further, an area in the display area of the image display device 5 that overlaps with the board 200 is made visible through the board 200.

In addition, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the downstream area of the game ball in the game area Y. has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

A first presentation unit 300 is provided at a lower position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at a position below the image display device 5. A second presentation unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third presentation unit 600 is provided above the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the top of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth presentation unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at the upper left position of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right side position of the board 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 is provided in which game balls flowing down the gaming area Y can win prizes.

The first production unit 300 and the fourth production unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, so that they can be seen through the board 200 from the player side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board board 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a BB sectional view of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts of (B) It is. Note that here, to aid understanding, the light-emitting region 506 is shown in dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is shown in white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 that is provided so as to be closed except for the right side and lower area of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51; An LED board 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 are mounted for inputting light into the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a condenser for condensing the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. Note that the light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate and has a predetermined front-to-back width dimension (plate thickness = approximately 5 mm), as shown in FIG. 10-4. It is arranged in front of the third presentation unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

The light guide plate 501 also includes a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface. , a light-emitting region that emits light by light that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the halftone dot area in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)), and A non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, it does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. and a non-emissive region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial edge appears at approximately the center of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the inside of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and directs it forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6(B) and (C), the light emitting region 506 has a fine unevenness state so that the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a is guided and emitted from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light-emitting region 506 is so small that it is difficult to see it with the naked eye. The surface is uneven.

When light enters the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting area 506 (see FIG. (See halftone area in 10-5). In other words, the light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region where a dot pattern is formed, and is a non-second region where a predetermined light guide pattern is not formed, in which the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters inside from the right end surface 501a is reflected forward and emitted from the front surface. The light emitting area 507 is an area where a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (figure) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as pictures, characters, symbols, designs, or patterns are also used. It may also be possible to display other display information.

Note that when the light guide plate 501 is in a state where no light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting area 506 is in a colorless and transparent state, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the The second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, when light is incident from the right end surface 501a, a portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but a portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 is formed on a light guide plate by a stamper or injection. 501 may be constructed using a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface (rear surface). In addition, the reflective section can be constructed using a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed with white ink on an acrylic plate, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with dot-shaped adhesive material, or a groove processing method. It's okay.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is approximately semicircular in cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be modified in various ways, such as a substantially triangular shape, as long as it constitutes a reflective surface that can reflect light toward the front (front surface).

The condensing lens 504 is formed of a light-transmitting member such as acrylic or polycarbonate into a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction. On the surface of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condensing lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. One convex portion 504A is formed corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502.

Note that the convex portions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence to the light guide plate LEDs 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Furthermore, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. May be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(C), the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Furthermore, the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is approximately the same as the front-rear width of the light-receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. The light is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condensing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condensing lens 504 is formed from the light guide plate LED 502 side to the light guide plate 501 side. It is a flat slope that gradually slopes forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape whose thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the distance between the gaps is large enough to prevent the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from coming into contact even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be explained. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape to form a lens surface, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 has high directivity, it is incident on the condenser lens 504. The light is radially diffused in the left-right direction within the condenser lens 504. Then, when the light incident on the condenser lens 504 passes through the inner curved lens surface, it is refracted toward the right and exits.

Thereby, even if the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be radially diffused to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area in the light guide plate 501 is It becomes possible to expand. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be caused to emit light. In addition, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is repeatedly totally reflected in the front and rear direction, and is condensed toward the approximately central position in the front and rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the condenser lens 504 The light is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the part with the smallest front-to-back width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be focused and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-back direction. In particular, even if the front-to-back width of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-to-back width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light guide plate does not diffuse the light from the light guide plate LED 502 in the front-to-back direction. 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected toward the front side (the player's side) at the light emitting region 506. As a result, when viewed from the player, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the reflected light, so that the area represented by halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 on the front surface of the light guide plate 501 emits surface light. The shape will now be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when viewed from the player (in the front-back direction), the image display device 5 is placed at the back, and the light guide plate device 500 is placed at the front. When viewed from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. Note that the image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. In FIGS. 10-7, (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit viewed diagonally from the front. In Figure 10-9, (A) is a CC cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7. FIG. 5 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 10-10, (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. 10-11, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first production unit 300 is arranged to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N1. It is mainly composed of a cover member 302, which is attached to the base member 302, and an LED board 303, which is attached to the front surface of the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so that it can be visually recognized through the glass window 50a and the board 200.

The base member 301 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat part 311 made of a flat surface, a recessed part 312 formed at the lower part of the flat part 311 and having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear wall part 313A located slightly behind the flat part 311. 313D.

On the upper part of the flat part 311, a plurality of trapezoidal convex parts 314A to 314E, which form part of a decorative pattern 331 to be described later, are formed in the longitudinal direction. The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. Note that the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined upward and rearward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). Furthermore, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED board 303, and is surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. ing. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat part 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LED 304 (to be described later) is located in front of the flat part 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED board 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the front surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a plurality of first performance LEDs 304 that can emit light forward and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown). At the same time, a plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the other hand, on the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic components (not shown) are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED board 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of the flat portion 311 and the recessed portion 312 of the base member 301; It mainly has second light-transmitting parts 322A and 322B corresponding to the first performance LED 304. Furthermore, a plurality of trapezoidal protrusions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the protrusions 314A to 314E of the base member 301.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second transparent parts 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first transparent part 321, and a recessed part 322D is formed on the back surface. It is possible to accommodate the first performance LED 304. In addition, a light diffusing part 322C consisting of a fine uneven part is formed on the back surface of the second light-transmitting part 322A, 322B, and can diffuse the light from the first LED 304 for effect at the rear and emit it forward. ing. Note that the uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first light-transmitting portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 each having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction, and decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and diagonally to the right. It has a decorative part 331D and a decorative part 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and by sharing the decorative parts 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331, a plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided. .

In addition, each of these decorative parts 331A to 331E can be formed by, for example, performing sandblasting on the back (or front) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or pasting a translucent sticker or the like. As a result, each of the decorative parts 331A to 331E appears milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), an LED board 303 as an electronic component having a first presentation LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with a cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, it is not possible for the player to see the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302. be.

Here, by disposing the same black base member 301 around (around) the black LED board 303, the LED board 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are It is difficult to see the boundary between BD and BD. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED board 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED board The cover member 302 is placed in a high position so as to cover the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, and the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 can be easily seen from the player side through the first transparent section 321. It is difficult for the first performance LED 304 to be visually recognized from the player side through the second light-transmitting portions 322A, 322B. In addition, by placing the milky white or translucent decorative parts 331A to 331E on the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, so that the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) is selected from among the plurality of decorative patterns 331. ) is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the decorative parts 331B and 331C made of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect with the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is arranged between two members (LED By being provided across the board 303 and cover member 302), one decorative pattern 331 looks as if it is provided on one member, so that the LED board 303 and cover member 302 on the back side It becomes difficult to recognize that they are separate parts.

In addition, a portion of the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 becomes difficult to see from the player side due to the overlapping decorative parts 331B and 331C on the front side, so the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable. Note that since the decorative parts 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap on the front side of the boundary part BD, the overlapping area with the boundary part BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 overlaps the LED board 303 and the cover. By being formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

In addition, the decorative part 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary part BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish because the aspect is similar to the boundary part BD. If the LED board 303 is milky white and has a brightness higher than black, it will be noticeable, and the LED board 303 will be less noticeable. Note that by arranging the decorative portions 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be made difficult to be visually recognized from the player side by the decorative portions 331A.

In addition, these decorative parts 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same way as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring Since the wiring pattern 320 and the wiring pattern 320 are similar (or common), it becomes difficult to tell them apart, so that the LED board 303 becomes difficult to stand out.

Furthermore, although the decorative parts 331D and 331E are different in appearance from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, they are thicker and larger in area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, so they are more noticeable than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD. In addition, a portion of the printed wiring 320 is overlapped with the front side of the printed wiring 320, making it difficult to visually recognize the printed wiring 320, thereby making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

Further, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of vertically flat hexagonal linear convex portions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) in aspect to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the aspect is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in the area of the base member 301 that is not covered with the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined areas that can be viewed from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302. By providing the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern 331, it becomes difficult to tell that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED board 303 is disposed in the recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, the LED board 303 is positioned below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, in a position spaced apart from the image display device 5. By providing this, it is located away from the image display device 5, which is the focus of the player's attention, so that it is less noticeable.

In this way, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is connected to the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. By straddling the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, it becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303, which would normally not be visible to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side, where they can be seen by the player, increasing the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly explained based on FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A).

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are configured as an integrated unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the lower left. In between, there is a game ball path 705A that allows a game ball (game ball P) to enter the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball (game ball P) that can enter the second starting winning hole of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which players P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 is provided with a plurality of performance LEDs 704 that can emit light forward.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a synthetic resin material having translucency. Therefore, the game balls passing through the game ball paths 705A, 705B can be visually recognized from the player side through the cover plate 702A.

(First production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14, (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first production unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIGS. 10-16 are diagrams for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side below the image display device 5, and when viewed from the player's side, The right end of the one performance unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13(B), the front part of the variable winning ball unit 700 is placed on the front side of the board 200, while the first production unit 300 is located on the front side of the board 200. It is located on the back side of the.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first transparent part 321 of the first presentation unit 300, is the second transparent part 322A, 322B. It is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 (L1A>L1B).

In the first light transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the first light transmitting portion 321, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction is XA %. In addition, in the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, light that is transmitted in the T direction is transmitted. The light transmittance is XB%. In other words, not all (100%) of the light that enters the first transparent section 321 and the second transparent sections 322A, 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some light may be reflected at the front surface. , is emitted at the rear in a direction different from the T direction (so that it spreads out to the surroundings). In particular, the second light transmitting parts 322A and 322B have a light diffusing part 322C made of uneven parts formed on the back surface, so that light can more easily transmit in a direction different from the T direction than the first light transmitting part 321. , the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light transmitting portion 321 (low transmittance; XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light that enters from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y %. Here, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the first light-transmitting part 321 and the second light-transmitting parts 322A, 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and difficult to be diffused to the surroundings before being emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second light transmitting part 322A, 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, since the light transmittance of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion on the back side of the cover plate 702A (for example, When viewing a predetermined portion (for example, the first performance LED 304 or LED board 303) on the back side of the cover member 302 from the player side through the cover member 302, than when viewing the ball P). Since the visibility is low, the LED board 303 including the first presentation LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, the first effect unit 300 has the same color (black) as the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around it. , the LED board 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front and rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front and rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the first production unit The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), the LED board 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a different position (on the right side) from the first production unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the player can see through the cover member 702. Since the visibility when viewing the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when viewing the game ball P, the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first production unit 300 Compared to this, the LED board 303 placed on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a light-transmitting member, appears to be more difficult to see. Further, since the cover member 302 is arranged closer to the back side than the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED board 303 are dark black, the LED board 303 becomes more inconspicuous.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member disposed around it, are of the same color (black), but the present invention The electronic component and the specific member do not have to be of the same color; for example, the electronic component and the specific member may have the same color or similar color.

Colors have three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness and saturation) and are adjacent in hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

Here, an example of "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in Figure 10-16. To explain based on this, when the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a predetermined number (here, 24 colors), Each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if cyan (C) is used as the standard color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to cyan (C), When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow ( When Y) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second presentation unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second presentation unit with the cover member removed. In FIGS. 10-18, (A) is a GG sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a HH sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram illustrating the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second presentation unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, and a front surface of the base member 401. It mainly consists of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403.As shown in FIG. It is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and circumferential surface) are white.

The LED board 403 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss protruding from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404A, 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403. Further, on the back side of the LED board 403, there are a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C that can emit light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D that can emit light downward, and other electronic components (not shown). ) are installed. The second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403. Further, the surface of the LED board 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED board 403, and includes a plurality of second performance LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED board 403; It is arranged between a plurality of second performance LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED board 403, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404B is The light is made incident on the rear end surface.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back side of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second performance LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406. The light is emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) in which a cross-sectional view in the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, the inner lens 405 is constructed using a molding method in which uneven parts are created on the back surface of the inner lens 405 using a stamper or injection. The reflective portion may be constructed by an adhesive dot method in which a dot-shaped adhesive material is attached to the plate, a groove processing method, or the like.

The cover member 402 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 401 and the LED board 403. At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a convex portion 410 having a shape that is a slightly enlarged version of the LED board 403 when viewed from the front is provided to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of the letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having a translucent property, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Furthermore, a light diffusing section 402A consisting of a concave and convex section is formed on the back surface of the convex section 410, so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In an area above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421A protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second performance LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421B protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second performance LEDs 404D. Note that a light diffusing portion made of an uneven portion may also be formed in a portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding stripes 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to be inclined rearward upwardly and downwardly from the convex portion 410.

The plurality of protrusions 421A, 421B have uneven parts continuously formed on the rear end surface, and a stepped part 421C is formed at a midway position in the longitudinal direction, and extends upward and downward from the protrusion 410. By extending so as to be inclined to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second presentation LEDs 404C and 404D can enter from these uneven parts and the stepped part 421C, and also The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405, and the light is emitted from the convex portion of the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered with a cover member 402. Covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, it is assumed from the player's side that a light diffusing portion is formed in the cover member 402 at a portion other than the protruding stripes 421A and 421B. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED board 403 through the parts other than the protrusions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by disposing the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED board 403, the LED board 403 is connected to the surrounding base member 401. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 forms the boundary between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and lower side of the portion BD. In other words, a part of the decorative part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD, so that a part of the boundary part BD is covered by the decorative part 420. By becoming less visible, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403 that you would not normally want to show to the player from the perspective of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side where the player can see them, which increases the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

Further, the decoration part 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary part BD is larger than that of the decoration pattern 331 described above, and by making the boundary part BD difficult to see, the LED board 403 It makes it less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decoration part 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and a part of the lower side of the boundary part BD when viewed from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portions 420 may be arranged at positions corresponding to all portions of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable to provide so that it may overlap about 1/3 or more of the boundary part BD.

Furthermore, since the letter “V” is displayed as a logo type on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logo type and become aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a jackpot is applied as a logo type is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”, characters indicating a variable display result, characters indicating a jackpot such as “heat”, “fierce heat”, and “!!”, characters such as the model name of a game machine, a title, the name of a character appearing, etc. may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means that can cause the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can see the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, the second performance LED 404A is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the player can see the LED board 403 because the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emitted light. Since it becomes difficult to notice the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion consisting of the letter “V”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 In the case where a plurality of decorative parts 420 are provided in a region of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative parts (for example, a pattern, etc.) different in form from the decorative part 420 are provided in a region other than the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorative parts It is preferable that the number of decorative parts is larger than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and is more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative parts and the plurality of predetermined decorative parts are different in form; for example, the predetermined decorative part may be an enlarged form or a reduced form of the decorative part, or the external shape, shape, Any one of the colors, sizes, etc. may be different.

The cover member 402 also includes a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. The light transmittance of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the light transmittance of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see through the convex part 410 from the player, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20, (A) is a front view showing the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. 10-21, (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing a presentation mode when the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit emit light. FIGS. 10-26 are schematic front views showing (A) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A), and 10-26, the third presentation unit 600 includes a base member 601 and a cover member disposed to cover the front side of the base member 601. 602, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. ) and the performance motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source that allows movement in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 10-26(B) and the performance position shown in FIG. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting production part 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, In other words, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 603 has a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall that projects from the front periphery of the base member 601 . On the front surface of the LED board 603, a plurality of third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The third performance LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. Further, the surface of the LED board 603 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Note that the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the production control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed to have almost the same shape as the LED board 603, and allows the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED board 603 to be viewed from the front side. It is arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with lights for diffusing and emitting the light from the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side toward the front. The provision of a light diffusing section 605A consisting of a concavo-convex portion allows surface light to be emitted.

The cover member 602 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 601 and the LED board 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of the letters "XXX" (logotype) is printed with a colored paint that has a translucent property, or a translucent sheet with letters printed thereon is attached. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Furthermore, a light diffusion section 602A consisting of a concave and convex portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602, and can diffuse the light from the inner lens 605 and emit it forward.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the characters "XXX" indicating a jackpot are applied as a logo type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the logo type is not limited to this. It may be characters such as the name of a character, characters indicating a variable display result such as "Jackpot", "BONUS", or "RUSH", or characters suggesting a jackpot such as "Heat", "Very Hot", or "!!". Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B to the front through the inner lens 605 is further transmitted to the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to section 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620 in this way, when the third effect LEDs 604A emit light, the letters "XXX" Since the periphery of the characters is illuminated, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission production section 630, is rotatably supported on a rotation axis with one end facing in the front-rear direction, and the other end emits light. The power transmission member of the arm member provided with the production section 630 can be changed in various ways, and may be a rack gear, a pinion gear, etc. as long as it can transmit power so that the light emission production section 630 can be moved in the vertical direction. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the fourth production unit 800 includes a base member 801, a cover member 802 disposed to cover the front side of the base member 801, and a base member 802. It mainly consists of an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the LED board 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803, and as shown in FIG. At the upper left part, it is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a portion of the periphery is formed into an arc shape along the guide rail 211 . Furthermore, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller in front view than the base member 801, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. On the front surface of the LED board 803, a plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The fourth presentation LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803, and are arranged in plural along the peripheral edge of the front surface of the LED board 803. Further, the surface of the LED board 803 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is placed in an area surrounded by the plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED board 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the back side of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth performance LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for reflecting the light forward. The light is emitted forward almost equally from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED board 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211 among the standing walls erected on the front periphery of the base member 801, and covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the part along the guide rail 211. Covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing section 802A consisting of a concave and convex portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth production unit 800, when the fourth production LED 804 emits light, the light emitted from the fourth production LED 804 forward through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 have the surfaces of their respective base members 601, 801 and LED boards 603, 803 of the same color, which is white, and these base members 601, 801 and the front sides of the LED boards 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, and the front side emits light when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth performance LED 804 are lit. has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side is covered with a cover. Covered by member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 602 is formed with the light diffusing section 602A, the cover member 602 cannot be seen from the player's side. Although it is possible to visually check the back side, an inner lens 605 with a light diffusion section 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED board 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), a standing wall of the base member 601 of the same white color is arranged around (around) the white LED board 603, so that the LED board 603 is connected to the surrounding base member. 601, the boundary BD between the LED board 603 and the cover member 602 is difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), an LED board 803 as an electronic component having a fourth presentation LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801, and is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 802 is formed with the light diffusing section 802A, the cover member 802 cannot be seen from the player's side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED board 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by disposing the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED board 803, the LED board 803 is connected to the surrounding base member 801. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth performance LED 804 is an angle type LED that enters light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803, so that the LED including the fourth performance LED 804 The front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered by the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which a reflecting portion and a light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, so that the player The visibility when the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 is viewed from the side through the inner lens 805 is the same as the visibility of the LED board 803 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B from the player side through the inner lens 605. The visibility is higher than that of 603. In other words, the LED board 803 is more noticeable than the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), furthermore, the arrangement position in the front-rear direction of the front surface is further forward (on the player side) than the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth production unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and The light emitting mode by the fourth effect LED 804 of the effect unit 800 is surface emission, whereas the light emission mode by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 is point light (see FIG. 10-25). In addition, in FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

In this way, the light emitting production unit 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is located closer to the player, and emits strong light. Therefore, the performance means has higher visibility than the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player side. That is, the third production unit 600, which is a production means with higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth production unit 800, is provided in the vicinity of the fourth production unit 800. Since the third presentation unit 600 is more conspicuous than the fourth presentation unit 800 and attracts more attention from players, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth presentation unit 800, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emitting effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side, and is located closer to the player. , an example has been shown in which the form is configured as a presentation means that is more visible than the LED board 803 and the base member 801 by emitting strong light; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third presentation The light emitting production section 630 of the unit 600 has improved visibility by being different from the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 in at least one of the size, position relative to the player, and light emission mode when viewed from the player side. It is good if the value is high.

Furthermore, the front surface of the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 as a production means may be colored with a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED board 803, or a decorative section with a color that is highly visible may be provided. The cover member 602 may be molded in a highly visible color to easily increase the visibility of the light emitting production section 630. Furthermore, the visibility of the light emitting effect part 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

In addition, although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 which can emit light by a light emitting means and can be operated by a production motor 631 is applied as a production means, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a light-emitting means (such as a lamp part) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or a effect means that does not emit light by a light-emitting means, or a light-emitting means provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3. It may be a production section that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed at the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, which protrudes further forward than the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a. The protruding part 3A is formed above the gaming area Y so as not to obstruct the visibility of the game ball passing through the upper part of the gaming area Y, but by protruding largely forward, it can be used for pachinko, for example. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game hall, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game hall being blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, by providing the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 at a position corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily lost in the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603, 803, a protrusion 3A is provided that protrudes toward the player side than the LED boards 603, 803, and the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603, 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED boards 603, 803 are in the shadow of the protrusion 3A and become less noticeable.

Further, although the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 are white in color, the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be dark colored (for example, black). By doing so, the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 can easily get lost in the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

Note that in this embodiment, a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player above the LED boards 603, 803 is used as the protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific members. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is not limited to a protrusion provided protrudingly from a part of the gaming machine frame 3, for example, It may be configured by other gaming devices (for example, winning ball device, etc.) or presentation devices provided in area Y. In addition, the protruding part 3A is not only fixed on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also moves from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the protruding part 3A can be positioned above the electronic parts and specific members. It may also be a protrusion that protrudes to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting area 506 when the light emitting part 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap in front and behind most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26).

More specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light enters the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 becomes in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting production section 630, and the power transmission member 632 are visible from the player's side to the light guide plate. 501 and becomes difficult or impossible to see. That is, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the light guide plate LED 502 to control the light emitting area during a movement period during which the light emission performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the performance position or during a performance period in which they are located at the performance position. By executing a light emitting effect in which the light emitting device 506 emits light, the light emitting effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or invisible to the player through the light guide plate 501. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) etc. provided along the member 632 from becoming conspicuous.

In addition, after the light emitting production section 630 moves to the production position, when the light guide plate LED 502 goes out and the light emission production of the light emitting area 506 is completed, the power transmission member 632, cable C, etc. become visible, but the light emitting production section By lighting up the third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B of 630 to make the light emission presentation section 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made less noticeable.

Additionally, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and cable C) that are operable in this way are visible to the player during the waiting period and movement period when they are waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or impossible to see from the player's side at least during the performance period when the player is located at the performance position. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the electronic components from becoming conspicuous during the presentation period that attracts the attention of the players.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the feature section 75SG of this embodiment has the following features:
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
In this way, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic parts become less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
Note that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they are similar in color. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member may be the same color (for example, black on black, white on white, etc.).

(Explanation regarding transformation and application of characteristic part 75SG)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first performance LED 304, second performance LEDs 404A to 404D, third performance LEDs 604A and 604B, and fourth performance LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although an example is shown in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied, the present invention is not limited to this. (including the control board 12, relay board, etc.), electronic parts such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members for fixing these.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, a form is illustrated in which a base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging an LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component is applied as a specific member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member that constitutes a part of a unit (device) that arranges or houses an electronic component as described above, it may be a member that is provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member provided separately from the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed (for example, a member forming part of another unit, or a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3). (a member constituting a part, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 forming part of a unit (device) in which electronic components are arranged or housed are applied as the light-transmitting member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the member does not constitute a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components as described above, it may be a member having translucency. If a member is provided so that a player can see through the electronic component and the specific member, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component (for example, It may be a member that constitutes a part of another unit, a member that constitutes a part of the game board 2 or the frame 3 for a game machine, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to the same color.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and , the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this, and electronic components and specific members are arranged from the player's side. When viewed visually, they may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping. Additionally, if the specific component is visible and placed around the electronic component when viewed from the player's side, the electronic component and the specific component are placed apart in the vertical, horizontal, front-back, etc. directions. may have been done.

Note that the specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position that is visible from the player's side together with the electronic component, and for example, is located within a range of approximately 5 cm from the electronic component. It may also include specific members.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency are used as the translucent members. The material is not limited to any particular material as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the electronic component and the specific component can be visually recognized by the player through the component, the component may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Furthermore, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members allow the player to pass through the cover members 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although a form in which a part or the entire area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member is visible is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component If the electronic component and the specific component are provided so as to be visible through the electronic component, the electronic component and the specific component can be visually recognized together even if at least a part of the specific component is not visible through the component. All you have to do is stay there.

Moreover, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members are the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, the base member 301 as a specific member, 401, 601, 801 are arranged along the electronic components and the specific member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific member. It doesn't have to be done. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the light-transmitting member.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the entire surface of the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 is colored in a predetermined color (black or white). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the colors of parts of the electronic component and the specific member that are visible through the transparent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) are similar colors. The entire surface does not necessarily have to be of similar color. Furthermore, the colors of these electronic components and specific components may be colored during the molding of the components, by painting or printing after molding, or by pasting stickers, etc. You can leave it there.

Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined electronic device that is difficult or invisible to the player and is installed separately from the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific component. parts (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members provided around the predetermined electronic components (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.). (a member for fixing the starting port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.), the predetermined electronic components (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) , it is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member that fixes the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

In this way, with respect to predetermined electronic components such as the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, and solenoids 81 and 82, which are provided in a manner that is difficult or invisible to the player, the balance with the predetermined member that fixes these components is determined. Since general-purpose products can be used without considering the above, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, by setting the color of the specific component to a color that has the same hue and has higher brightness or saturation than the color of the electronic component, the visibility of the specific component will be higher than that of the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively less noticeable.

Further, by coloring the light-transmitting member in a similar color to the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

For example, in a case where electronic components such as a black LED board are arranged on the right side of the game board 2, an electronic component such as a black LED board may be installed on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side with the image display device 5 in between. By providing an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or similar color as the electronic component separately from the specific component so as to be visible to the player, the black components can be arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5 in a well-balanced manner. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable, and the electronic components can be made less noticeable. In this way, the electronic component can be made less noticeable by symmetrically arranging a member of the same color or similar color as the electronic component at a separate position from the specific member.

Further, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 75SG may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, when the effects described in the characteristic parts 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed on the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described in the characteristic part 75SG provided around the image display device 5 , the electronic components of the second presentation unit 400, the third presentation unit 600, and the fourth presentation unit 800 are less noticeable, so that the above presentation can be presented in a suitable manner.

Specifically, for example, as explained in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even during periods other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 etc. In cases where control is to be performed so that electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (e.g., base members 301, 401, 601, 801) are controlled (e.g., game effect lamps 9) The light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position closer than the game effect lamp 9 may also be controlled so as not to be performed (or the light amount to be lower than that of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing this, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, thereby preventing electronic components and specific components from becoming more noticeable. can.

Also, among the second light-emitting members provided around the electronic components and the specific member, the second effect is capable of surface-emitting the decorative portion 420 of the transparent member disposed on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member. For light-emitting members such as the LED 404A that are not noticeable even if they continue to emit light, the light amount may be maintained (not restricted in execution) even when controlling not to perform a light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting member. . By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members less noticeable without reducing the presentation effect too much.

Further, in the embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of game balls is Rental balls that are circulated inside the gaming machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the subtracted value is stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of a game medium, but the invention is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and that is A visibly provided electronic component (e.g., LED board 303, 403, 603, 803) and a specific member (e.g., base member 301) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component. , 401, 601, 801), and a translucent member (for example, cover member 302) that is provided so that the player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member. , 402, 602, 802), predetermined electronic components (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player; A predetermined member provided around a predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.); , cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301) (see FIG. 10-12), the predetermined member has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component, and the predetermined member also includes an operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the operation means vibrates. The vibration effects include predetermined vibration effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and special vibration effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). etc.) (for example, an effect that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern and the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) control CPU 120, etc.) and a light emission effect that can execute a light emission effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 according to a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern). Executing means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part performance control pattern determined in step AKS203), and a specific performance according to the progress of the game. (For example, SP reach A reach effect, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) Specific effect execution means (for example, variable display effect in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) (such as a production control CPU 120 that executes processing), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration production is executed than when the predetermined vibration production is not executed. (for example, jackpot reliability depending on the operation part performance pattern, etc.), the control is made into the advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance, and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed. The proportions are different (for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the luminous color included in the operation part performance pattern and the use of the operation part performance pattern), and the vibration performance execution means executes the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance. possible (for example, execution of a vibration effect during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.) Examples include gaming machines.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, as for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to improve the game's interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

In other words, it is possible to create a game machine that has a good appearance while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and also to determine whether or not a given vibration effect is executed at the timing of the light emitting mode that has a high rate of controlling the predetermined vibration effect to an advantageous state. Since it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special vibration performance will be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance, the game enjoyment can be improved. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in a gaming parlor and easily attracts players' interest.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and improve gaming interest, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. (for example, a pachinko game machine 1), which includes an operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined vibration effect (for example, an operation section) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. Vibration performance execution means (such as driving the vibration motor 131 using the vibration pattern included in the performance pattern) and special vibration performance (such as driving the vibration motor 131 using the vibration control data included in the variable display performance control pattern) For example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display production processing in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part production control pattern and the variable display production control pattern determined in step AKS203, etc.), and the predetermined vibration production. Accordingly, a light emission effect execution means (for example, the operation determined in step AKS203) that can execute a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light (for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light according to the emission color included in the operation part effect pattern) A performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the partial performance control pattern), and a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmed notification) according to the progress of the game. , jackpot type lottery, etc.) (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203); The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.) etc.), the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is jackpot reliability depending on the usage of the emitting color and the operation part performance pattern), and the vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance (for example, the vibration performance during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05). execution, etc.), and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the first prize winning hole and the second prize winning hole (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is determined by the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the first and second prize openings (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. It is a percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in an off state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the recovery process (step S904) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. Through the recovery process in step S904, a work area is set based on the storage contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stop. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), initialization processing (step S906) is executed, and then setting change processing (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S905 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are met in the setting confirmation process in step S905, a setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are met in the setting change process in step S907, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the settings confirmation start command or the settings change start command, control may be performed to notify that settings are being confirmed or settings are being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the step The setting change process in S907 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S904 and the setting confirmation process in step S905 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S906 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S904 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 13(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 13(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and the control will be controlled to a small win gaming state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Explanation of features related to setting suggestion effects)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting suggestion performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this characteristic part, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 14-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, a preview performance determination process is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination process enables determining the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special symbol variation performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various performance executions. For example, in response to a variation pattern indicated by a variation pattern designation command, one of a plurality of prepared special symbol variation performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Further, one of the plurality of prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in accordance with the determination result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. In addition, the performance control pattern at the time of special figure change and the advance notice performance control pattern are not limited to those that set separate performance control patterns, but one performance control pattern that corresponds to the combination of execution settings of each performance. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control timer setting section, etc.) corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. A value is set (step S204). Further, settings are made to start changing decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure variation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the time of starting the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display area corresponding to the hold number "1" (leftmost display area) is erased (disappeared), and other hold numbers "2" to The pending display in the display area corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. The active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5 may display an active display corresponding to the pending display that has been erased (expired) in the pending display area. In addition, if the number of pending memories is "0" and the variable display starts immediately based on the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting winning, the active display area will not be updated without updating the pending display. Settings may be made to update the active display in . Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 14-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether a super reach effect is to be executed (step S221). Whether or not the super reach effect is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the super reach effect is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. When there is no reach, the variable display result will be "losing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result is a "loss". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is not a ready-to-reach mode, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reachable combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have different (inconsistent) decorative symbols. At the time of a normal reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) decorative symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determined decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot. The final stopped symbol at the time of a jackpot is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result becomes a "loss". At the time of super reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss", the same (matching) decorative pattern will be displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. It will be stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such reach-loss combinations and jackpot combinations are also referred to as reach-to-reach symbols. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-reach symbols may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decorative pattern corresponding to the number may be only a presentation image showing the number, or may be a presentation image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the ready-to-reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the ready-to-win symbol. Just do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win symbol may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may vary depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot." For example, when the variable display result is a "lose", the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the decorative patterns corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As the number increases, the determination rate of the decorative pattern increases, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state becomes the highest, and 6 , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" when it is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low. Therefore, the variable display result when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state becomes the lowest. In addition, in the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "lose" or "jackpot". The number of judgment values assigned may be different for each decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern, or the number of judgment values allocated may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of decorative symbols that become reach symbols may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance is determined depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. All you have to do is make it so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance is determined to be either "no performance", which does not execute the setting suggestion performance, or "with performance", which executes the setting suggestion performance.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed (with effect) (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion performance is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and stores the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereby, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, a setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is ended. The setting suggestion pattern is selected from among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random values for setting suggestion pattern determination. It would be better if it were decided accordingly. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 14-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 14-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of setting suggestion performance is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "with effect" for performing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "loss". With such setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher than when the setting suggestion performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion performance execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". .

FIG. 14-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not to change the symbol display color and the display color when changing. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggested display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is the normal display color. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, indicating that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, indicating that 6 is the highest set value. In this manner, in the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-reach symbols, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on whether the symbol display color has changed or not, and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 14-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 14-4(B) as a setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are parts where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed, since the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. Furthermore, when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. In this way, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach mode includes a symbol display mode that gives a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a 7. It includes a pattern display mode that provides suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as decorative patterns corresponding to numbers, and also provides suggestions regarding the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the symbol display color is changed after the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state will be continuously made, and suggestions regarding the setting values will be made.

The setting suggestion performance can be executed in different manners depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, so the symbol display color is not changed to copper color. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is changed as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed to copper color. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, so the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is gold as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed.

The setting suggestion effect is instead of changing the display color of a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, or in addition to changing the display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of background images, outer frame images, and other arbitrary performance images, the output of audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable performance members, and the like, It may be possible to change the presentation mode by any presentation device, such as a combination of some or all of them. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed using arbitrary data related to effect control, arbitrary data not related to effect control, or data that is a combination of these, predetermined for execution of the effect. It only needs to be executable when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also referred to as a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when controlled to a jackpot gaming state and patterns that can be determined even when not controlled to a jackpot gaming state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even if the variable display result is a "loss", whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 can be determined with a variable display result. It may be possible to make a determination at a predetermined rate only when the result is a "jackpot", and to make it impossible to determine when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, pattern RE-2 is determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 14-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process as the variable display performance process. In the variable display production process, it is determined whether or not a special figure variation time, which is a variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, for example (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, audio control board 13, lamp control board 14, etc. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, turned off, or blinked. It is only necessary that a predetermined performance device can perform various performances by operating a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is a preview performance period (step S242). If it is the preview performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step S243). If it is not the preview performance period (step S242; No), or after performing the control in step S243, it is determined whether it is the ready-to-reach performance period (step S244). If it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the ready-to-win effect (step S245). By the control in step S245, when executing the ready-to-win effect after changing the symbol display color after the decorative symbols that become ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are made, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Suggestions regarding setting values can be made.

If it is not the ready-to-win performance period (step S244; No), or after performing the control in step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be predetermined as an execution period of a performance that changes the symbol display color when a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, the decorative pattern may be changed in other ways based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, for example. After performing control to execute the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is ended.

The change performance period may be set to different lengths of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period, which is longer than the first period, and pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest period, the fourth period. Generally, when a performance that informs an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player takes an image or video of that performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and posts it on SNS (Social Media). They tend to post on membership-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, a problem arises in that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, effects that are often performed even in unfavorable situations (unfavorable effects) do not stimulate the desire to take pictures, so if the unfavorable effects are carried out for a long time, they may end up making players feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. Thereby, when a performance advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the performance, and it is also possible to secure the shooting time. Furthermore, by securing the shooting time, the captured images and videos can be made public by the players on the Internet, and the public's interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, the photos taken at which pachinko machine 1 in which gaming parlor are made public, which from the perspective of the gaming parlor indicates that the player is advertising the gaming parlor. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the players but also to the game parlor side.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving a symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process will be executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may also do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed ornamental symbol) that will be the display result in the variable display of decorative symbols (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the production process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display production process is ended.

FIG. 14-6 shows an example of execution of setting suggestion effect. FIG. 14-6(A) shows an example of performance execution HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. Decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, whereby a reach is established and a reach effect of normal reach is executed. FIG. 14-6(B) shows a performance execution example HD 102 in which the reach performance of normal reach progresses to the reach performance of super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the reach effect of super reach is displayed. FIG. 14-6(C) shows a performance execution example HD 103 in which a change performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed. A production display corresponding to the change production is displayed superimposed on the reach-to-reach symbol that is being stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made by displaying an effect image that notifies the user of a message such as "Change symbol display color!!".

FIG. 14-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to pattern RE-0. FIG. 14-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the symbol display color changes to copper color by pattern RE-1. FIG. 14-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver according to pattern RE-2. FIG. 14-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to pattern RE-3. In the performance execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains unchanged at the normal display color of red. In this way, a failed performance (falsified performance) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to copper color by pattern RE-1, thereby indicating that the set value is 2 or more. In the performance execution example HD113, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol is changed to silver by pattern RE-2, which suggests that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to gold by pattern RE-3, thereby suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is confirmed.

Setting suggestion effects include not only changing effects that can change the display color of the reach symbols, but also suggesting the expected level of jackpot through arbitrary effects such as pseudo-continuous effects and look-ahead preview effects, as well as setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may also be possible to make suggestions regarding. During execution of the variable display, a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. When executing any performance, there are two cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made after making suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made and the pachinko player It may also include a case where suggestions regarding setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. When executing an arbitrary performance, there are two cases in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then the suggestion ends, and another case in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is concerned. It may also include a case where a suggestion is made.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by giving a suggestion based on the effect mode of the pattern that is determined at a high rate. It is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest in the game.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be made, but suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "Jackpot", the pachinko game machine A suggestion regarding the setting value of 1 may be made. There may be cases where a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made without making any suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Explanation of characteristic part 10SH)
Next, the characteristic part 10SH of this embodiment will be explained.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes an operation means that can be operated by a player. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a line-of-sight guide performance execution means that can execute a line-of-sight guide performance for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to control the production control CPU 120 at any one of timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols starts, timing T2 when reach is established, and normal reach after timing T1 and timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at either timing T3 when the reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may press the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is one of timing T1 and timing T2, or timing T3 and timing T4. It is possible to perform a vibration performance in a manner in which the vibration time and the luminous color are the same.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance performance at the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the gaze guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance while the line-of-sight guidance performance is being performed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance different from the vibration performance and the eye-guide performance. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance when a super reach performance is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various performance images.

The display of the line-of-sight guiding effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image for the eye-guiding performance has a lower priority than a constant small pattern, a pending number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than a pending display, an active display, a background image, and a decorative pattern.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light by lighting the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to provide various vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs are built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 15-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, and produces game effects in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn on/off lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

For example, a motor control board 130 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 15-3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. The production control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 15-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 9.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display and are specified by the effect control command analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the random numbers for effect that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random number for effect updating process is used.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when executing the vibration performance (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration performance that is not linked to a preview performance. In the process of step 10SHS2, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration production is to be executed and the execution pattern of the vibration production when executing the vibration production, using random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referenced in the lottery in step 10 SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is determined according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. The determined value to be compared with the random number value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect so that the vibration effects are different.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain performance A is, for example, (probability that performance A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result will be a "jackpot")/{(display result Probability that effect A will be executed when is a “jackpot”) × (probability that the display result will be a “jackpot”) + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a “jackpot”) x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "jackpot")]

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery in step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is set so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value when the display result becomes "jackpot". It is sufficient that the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration performance of each execution pattern is executed when the display result does not become a "jackpot" are stipulated.

(Contents of vibration performance and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 15-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment uses execution patterns SE1 to SE1 to It is possible to perform multiple types of vibration effects of SE10.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is established. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, it does not perform the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the reach is established. Furthermore, when executing the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as vibration effects at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration performance at timing T2 when the reach is established.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment operates between timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when the normal reach reach performance is being executed, and timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. The vibration effect can be performed at any of the timings. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at timing T3 when the normal reach performance is being executed, it does not execute the vibration performance at timing T4 when the super reach performance is being executed. Furthermore, when executing the vibration effect at timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect. Further, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration performance at timing T4 while the super reach performance is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be performed while the super reach effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is configured to control whether the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing T1, the normal reach reach performance is being executed at timing T3, or the super reach reach performance is being executed. Regardless of whether it is the timing T4 of It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light emits red light. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light. It is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light. It is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow color light regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. It is possible to perform vibration effects. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. The reliability of the jackpot is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is a "jackpot". will be notified definitively.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to draw attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is pushed. When a vibration effect in which the button 31B emits red light is executed, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols starts than when executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. Highly reliable jackpot. In addition, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed than when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. , the reliability of the jackpot is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, if the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T1, the super reach effect will be used instead of the normal reach effect at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. It is possible to increase expectations for the vibration performance to be performed at timing T4 during execution. In fact, when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of normal reach is being executed, expectations are further increased for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of super reach is being executed. be able to.

Note that the jackpot reliability of the vibrating performance that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach performance. In addition, if it is possible to execute multiple types of normal reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach reach effect is being executed is , it is sufficient that the reliability is higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibrating effect that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach effect is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach effect. In addition, if it is possible to perform multiple types of super reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the vibration effect jackpot that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the super reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of super reach reach performance.

According to such a configuration, a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being performed, or a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being performed, can be used as a chance-up performance. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed in such a manner that the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. This will definitely notify you that the displayed result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, rather than at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In fact, when the vibrating effect is not executed at the timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started, expectations for the vibrating effect to be executed at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved can be further enhanced.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the variable display of decorative symbols progresses, expectations for the execution of the vibration effect can be changed in a complex manner.

Furthermore, the probability that a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light is sufficiently low compared to the probability that other types of vibration effects will be executed. By specifying this, it is possible to increase the interest when it is definitely announced that the display result will be a "jackpot".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chances of making the user recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 15-3, after that, according to the determination result in step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed and the super reach reach performance in the current variable display. It is determined whether or not the vibration effect is to be executed at any one of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, if the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guiding effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance performance is a performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guide effect based on random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the ratio of determining the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance performance at the same rate regardless of the mode of the current vibration performance.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. It is possible to perform eye-direction effects.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

On the other hand, when performing the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance performance is not performed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, after the display result of "missing" is displayed, a relief effect may be executed and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display has been derived and displayed and the current variable display has started, if the eye guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, There is a possibility that the previous variable display may give the misunderstanding that a relief effect is being executed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the line-of-sight guiding effect is not performed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, so it is possible to prevent such misunderstanding from occurring.

Furthermore, if the line-of-sight guide performance is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern has become a predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guide effect is not performed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern has become a predetermined reach mode. .

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 15-3, if the vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of step 10SHS3; No) or step 10SHS4, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute other performances such as a reach performance, the mode of the performance to be executed, etc. (step 10SHS5). Specifically, whether or not various performances such as a preview performance will be performed and their mode are determined by lottery. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot is varied depending on whether or not a preview performance is performed and its mode by varying the determination ratio in the lottery according to the current display result, the current variation pattern, etc. Furthermore, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined to execute the reach effect specified by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 sets a timer value according to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the production control process timer, and also sets the type and mode of the production decided to be executed. The effect specifying data specifying the effect and the execution timing specifying timer value indicating the execution timing of the effect by comparison with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in a timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of performances determined to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores performance specifying data and an execution timing specifying timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start the variable display of the decorative symbols that derive the determined final stop symbol in the manner specified by the current variation pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of decorative symbols. Note that at this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration effects and line-of-sight guide effects)
FIG. 15-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing and performance period of the vibration performance and the eye-guide performance. As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when a reach is established. In addition, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. It is possible.

Further, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect before that.

If the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the eye-gaze guidance performance before the vibration performance at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed, the performance control CPU 120 starts the sight-line guidance performance 4 seconds before timing T3. , the vibration effect is started at timing T3. Similarly, in the case where the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guide effect before executing the vibration effect at timing T4 during execution of the super reach reach effect, the line-of-sight guide effect is executed 4 seconds before timing T4. The effect is started, and when the timing T4 comes, the vibration effect is started. The production period of the gaze guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 15-6 and 15-7 are diagrams illustrating examples of performance operations of vibration performance and line-of-sight guidance performance. In this performance operation example, an example will be described in which a vibration performance is executed at timing T4 while a super reach performance is being executed.

The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as a background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the super reach effect is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced size of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed when the reach effect was established. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6(A), the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is achieved. , and a "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established, are displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, variable display of small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing a small pattern that becomes a notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing a confirmed small pattern that becomes a display result is displayed. derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, small patterns different from decorative patterns are variably displayed. During the period from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the final decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of small patterns is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small symbols disappear from the screen or are obstructed by obstacles. It will not be blocked by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK are also referred to as permanent small symbols or presentation small symbols. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a plurality of identifiable patterns are displayed in a display mode that is partially or completely common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that shows numbers in the same way as a part that shows numbers in a decorative pattern. A performance image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a notification information image. Note that the small pattern may be displayed only when the decorative pattern is hidden. For example, after a variable display of a decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode, instead of a variable display of a decorative pattern, a variable display of a small pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 15-6(A). It may be displayed in the lower left corner of the .

Note that a fourth symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and the normal symbol, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is, for example, repeated display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth symbol display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are connected to the display screen of the image display device 5 on the right side of the gaming area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-1. is located at a remote location. Therefore, the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. In some cases, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current state is in progress or whether a display result has been derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether variable display is in progress or not. Whether or not a display result has been derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In addition, in this example, there is a pending display area 10SHH for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , is displayed. Note that when the super reach effect is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

Furthermore, a pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the pending number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the pending display area 10SHH, the pending number of the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure game is displayed in a specifiable manner. The display mode is that of arithmetic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guide effect four seconds before timing T4 during which the reach effect of super reach is being executed. The production control CPU 120 executes a production that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual production effect, for example, as a gaze guidance production.

In this example, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 15-6(B). do.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character makes an action of raising a hammer, as shown in FIGS. 15-6(B) to 15-6(D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. 15-7(E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R, as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (G), the performance control CPU 120 controls the button image 10SHB when the hammer swung down by the character collides with the button image 10SHB to create a plurality of stars imitating the button image 10SHB. The appearance of various images is changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS of the image is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (G), the performance control CPU 120 starts the vibration performance at timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and causes the push button 31B to vibrate. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 ends the eye-guide performance, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (H). After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the vibration performance and stops the vibration of the push button 31B when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance has elapsed, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 15-1, for example. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and to check whether the push button 31B is vibrating or not, or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the On the other hand, by performing a line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set lower than that of the constant small symbol and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer on the back side of the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figure 15-7 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the small symbol always displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, creating an eye-guiding effect. It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a lower priority than the regular small symbol.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 15-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the pending number display displayed in the pending number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the display of the number of reservations.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer that is in front of a layer that displays a background image or a decorative pattern among a plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figures 15-6(B) to 15-7(G), the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the "mountain scenery" background image 10SHY. It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery".

Additionally, in this example, as shown in Figure 15-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-reach decorative pattern 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

Additionally, in this example, as shown in Figure 15-6(D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the eye-guiding effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SHH, and the eye guidance effect is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the pending display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 15-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the eye-guiding effect is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance can be made conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbols and the pending number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 15-6 (B) to 15-7 (G), when the line-of-sight guiding effect is being executed, the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect and the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect are Also, small symbols and pending number display, which have high priority, are displayed brightly, and other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, it is possible to better ensure the visibility of the small design and the pending number display at all times, and to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance more noticeable. .

(Modified example of characteristic part 10SH)
The invention related to the characteristic part 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 15-3, the determination ratio of whether or not to use the eye-guiding effect may be set depending on which type of vibration effect is to be executed. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration performance is a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. Depending on whether it is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits a red light, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color. The presence or absence of eye-guiding effects may be determined at different ratios. Here, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light, it is easy to execute the gaze guiding effect. In addition, when a vibration effect is performed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors, the eye guidance effect is always performed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance performance is executed, the execution rate of the vibration performance with higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not performed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance. In this case, there are multiple types of vibration performances that are linked to the preview performance, depending on the combination of the linked preview performance, the vibration duration of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the emitting color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120 can execute an accessory preview effect that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display that is being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32. The performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance that is linked to a highly reliable accessory preview performance. This vibration effect is an effect that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance in this case should just be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked accessory preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the accessory preview performance.

Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked with other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration effect is an effect that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview effect, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance in this case should just be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after a determined decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination is derived, the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole. By doing so, a jackpot game state may be started. In that case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration performance that is linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and is executed in the jackpot game state. Notify that the upper limit number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It may be definitely notified that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the gaming state is the highest number of rounds among a plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the production control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 is capable of displaying an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance performance. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect only needs to have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed when displaying the error notification image.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It can improve your interest when playing. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is made longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. , it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be set to a certain timing as a reference, and may be made different between a timing before the reference timing and a timing after the reference timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before timing T2, based on timing T2 when reach is achieved. , timing T3 when normal reach reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when super reach reach effect is being executed, which is a timing later than timing T2, is 3 seconds. The vibration time at a timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at a timing before the reference timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be different. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated at a first strength and times when it is vibrated at a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated at the second strength. When vibrating the push button 31B at the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than that when the push button 31B is vibrated at the first strength. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration performance and the jackpot reliability may be the same between the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution patterns of the vibration performances and jackpot reliability that are respectively executed in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration performance may be executed as a pre-read preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase opportunities to perform vibration effects.

In addition to this, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production as a pre-reading notice performance is different when the vibration mode is the first mode and when it is the second mode. , the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution that is the target of the pre-read notice may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production as a pre-read preview production is such that it vibrates continuously for a predetermined period of time, and when the vibration mode is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, To make jackpot reliability different in a variable display before execution that is a target of a look-ahead notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance.

Alternatively, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance, the execution timing of the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance may be set to multiple times that can execute the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It may be possible to execute only one of the timings. For example, the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance can be performed only at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as a pre-read notice can be executed, the vibration effect is executed as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It is possible to appropriately recognize that the execution has been carried out.

When performing a vibration performance as a preview performance at a timing when a vibration performance is possible as a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is being executed, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is being executed is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview performance may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance. For example, if it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a preview effect at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. The vibration time of the push button 31B is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview preview performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which it continues to vibrate for a predetermined period of time, and the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance The mode of vibration is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off over a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, in the case where the vibration performance as a preview performance can be executed at the timing when the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed can be executed, either It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

When the first model of pachinko game machine 1 and the second model of pachinko game machine 1 which is different from the first model have the same vibration performance execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the vibration effect is executed at a specific timing. Regarding the vibration effect, even if the mode of the vibration effect executed on the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the mode of the vibration effect executed on the second model pachinko game machine 1 are different, the jackpot cannot be won. The reliability may be the same. For example, regarding the vibration performance executed at timing T2 when reach is established, the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the specific performance executed in the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the jackpot reliability is assumed to be 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect to be performed at that time, for example, if the eye-guide effect is not performed. For example, when executing a notification effect to notify that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is used to vibrate the push button 31B during a period in which the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guide performance is not performed, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the performance being executed at that time, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different from the first model have the same execution pattern and jackpot reliability, vibrations of the same execution pattern can be used. Regarding the production, only the lower limit value of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when a vibration performance is executed as a performance to increase the chance of another performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance can be flexibly determined in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other performance. While making adjustments, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be able to be performed at a timing different from timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-win mode, the production control CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination, and then temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination. It is possible to perform an inciting performance that incites development into a reach mode. After the promotion effect is executed, there are cases in which the reach mode is developed with high reliability of jackpot, and cases where the display result becomes "miss" without developing into the reach mode with high reliability of jackpot. When developing into a ready-to-win mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 executes a successful promotion performance that notifies the development to a ready-to-reach mode with high jackpot reliability as a result of the promotion performance. On the other hand, if the display result is "miss" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 notifies that the reach mode with high jackpot reliability will not develop as a result of the promotion performance. Execute the inciting failure performance. In executing such an inciting effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the inciting success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the successful inciting performance is performed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful stimulation performance may be adjusted to match the image of the successful stimulation performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the successful inciting effect is executed.

The emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the inciting success performance is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the presentation may have the same luminescent color as the luminescent color. According to such a configuration, when a successful inciting performance is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be a "miss" even if the reach mode develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. It is possible to prevent it from increasing.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the interest at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to increase expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to prevent the vibration performance from being performed at other timings as well. It can improve your interest when playing.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model have the same vibration performance execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the advantage to the player is Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different numbers, the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration production can be "rainbow color". do. According to such a configuration, when the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid giving the misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage. It can be done.

If there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the jackpot type, an execution pattern in which the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance is "rainbow color" may not be provided. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration performance, it is possible to prevent a "jackpot" of a jackpot type that has a low advantage to the player, It is possible to prevent expectations for the vibration performance from being impaired.

The performance control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using an auditory performance effect as a gaze guidance performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when a vibration production is being performed, and then gradually increases the volume of the specific sound effect from a low volume to a high volume as a line-of-sight guidance production. Output as it changes. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the attention of a player who has difficulty recognizing the line-of-sight guiding performance using visual performance effects to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

If the configuration is such that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, even if the vibration performance has the same execution pattern, the first setting value and the second setting value different from the first setting value may be used. The jackpot reliability of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may be different depending on the time. For example, even if the vibration effect has the same execution pattern, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "jackpot", it is possible to increase expectations that the set value is highly advantageous.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be changed depending on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emitted light color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the setting value is any one of "1" to "3", and when the setting value is any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect is It is sufficient if the vibration time and emitted light color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the high setting is likely to be the setting value "6" which is most advantageous for the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the set value is an even number, which may be the set value "6" that is most advantageous to the player.

At timing T2 when reach is achieved, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to draw attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the manner in which the vibration effect is executed.

At timing T2 when reach is achieved, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. If it is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted, the vibration effect is executed at both timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when reach is established. There may be times when In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at timing T1 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T2 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, it is possible not only to increase expectations for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T2 when reach is established, but also to further increase attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T2. .

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at timing T3 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T4 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 while the normal reach effect is being executed, the vibration effect causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible to not only increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed, but also to draw more attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T4. can be increased.

The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B may be different from those shown in FIG. For example, the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot," the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous, but it definitely reports that the display result is a "jackpot." In the vibration effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the vibration performance that definitively notifies the player that the display result is a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or at timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be always executed. According to such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means is suitably recognized, thereby suitably increasing the expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of the reach effect. be able to.

When performing a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, a timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed; The vibration effect may be made possible to be performed at any one of the timing T4 and the time when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is set so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at timing T3, and the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at timing T4; limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the jackpot reliability from being lowered.

When it is possible to perform a vibration performance that is linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance may be different from the mode of the vibration performance that is not linked to the preview performance. For example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to the accessory preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the sound effect when the accessory moves. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from that of the push button 31B in a vibration performance not linked to a preview performance. According to such a configuration, when a vibration performance is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration performance is linked to a preview performance or not linked to a preview performance. .

It may also be possible to perform a present box effect. In this case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer as shown in FIG. 15-6(B) may pop out from the opened present box, and a line-of-sight guidance effect may be performed. According to such a configuration, since the present box effect is executed, it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the line-of-sight guidance effect and the vibration effect.

When it is possible to perform an operation effect that causes the push button 31B to be operated, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation validity period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the manner in which the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect. For example, when lighting the push button 31B for a vibration effect, the control may be such that the push button 31B emits red light continuously for 3 seconds while the push button 31B vibrates, resulting in a lighting mode for the vibration effect. . On the other hand, when lighting the push button 31B in the operation performance, the button operation switches the push button 31B between red light emission (lighting up) and non-light emission (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds during the operation validity period. It may be controlled to have a lighting mode for suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. Note that during the valid lever operation period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to notify that the operation of the operation lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the valid lever operation period to provide a lighting mode for suggesting a lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting a lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation.

For example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like can be operated by the player to, for example, set the volume of the effect to be executed, set the type of music and background to be output, and display images. Settings related to effects, such as the brightness setting of the device 5 and the brightness settings of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which production setting to change from the menu screen, or a different operation may be performed depending on the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. You can do it like this. Further, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the settings related to the performance can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation production. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the settings regarding the performance can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic part 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, (See Publication No. 2019-051075).

Generally, a player plays a game while viewing a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, even if a vibration effect is executed, the player may not be able to recognize that the operating means is vibrating. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently increase the interest through vibration effects.

Therefore, in order to attract attention to the gaming means before the vibration performance is executed and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature section 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), and an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player). includes a push button 31B that can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button, etc.), and a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the performance control CPU 120 includes a push button 31B (e.g., the CPU 120 for controlling the effect is capable of executing a vibrating effect in which the player vibrates), a line-of-sight guiding effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guiding effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guide effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the control is controlled to be in the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.), and the vibration effect execution means is , the vibration effect can be executed at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started). , timing T2 when reach is established, timing T3 after timing T1 and timing T2 when normal reach reach effect is being executed, and timing when super reach reach effect is being executed. T4, etc.), the vibration effect can be performed in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. can be executed (for example, the production control CPU 120 can perform the following regardless of whether it is at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any one of timing T3 and timing T4). (first, the vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emitted light color are the same); For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the eye-gaze guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing (such as not executing the gaze-guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2, etc.). , the performance control CPU 120 is characterized by being able to execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operating means before the vibration performance is executed, and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance.

In the gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature part 10SH, in the gaming machine of the means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line of sight guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control The CPU 120 may be configured to be able to perform a vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine of the means 1 or 2, the gaming machine of the means 3 related to the feature part 10SH has a specific performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is , a super reach reach effect, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (For example, it is possible to perform a vibration effect while a super reach effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is being executed, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images). ), and the display of the line-of-sight guide effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the display of the line-of-sight guide effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information). may have a lower priority than a small symbol, a pending number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than a pending display, an active display, a background image, a decorative symbol, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being performed, it is possible to suitably ensure the visibility of the predetermined information while making the visibility of the line-of-sight guide effect noticeable.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic part 10SH is the gaming machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, in which the vibration performance execution means executes the vibration performance of the first aspect and the advantageous state than the first aspect. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 1.5 seconds and It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits white light, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit red light. When a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light than when a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light is executed. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, the vibration effect of the second aspect is more likely to be performed in a pachinko game). In machine 1, when the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted white light. At the same time, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is easier to perform, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect of the second aspect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be combined with a part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 16-1 shows an example of the configuration of the presentation device regarding the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance serving as a movable performance device is provided at the front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side that overlaps with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to an operating motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operating motor. The movable body 32 may be able to change its position by power from an operating solenoid or other general actuator, for example.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is constructed using a decorative member, and has a structure that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed using transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a transparent configuration so that the player can visually check the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built into the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or entirely formed of a translucent member. Thereby, by lighting the lever lamp 9B1, it is possible to cause the operating lever of the stick controller 31A to emit light. Further, by lighting the button lamp 9B2, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light.

For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or near the push button 31B, built into the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, or provided at the base of the operating lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestion performance suggesting that the control is to be controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned on to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with the vibration effect. In addition, in the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, one of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect. Good too. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect.

FIG. 16-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation section performance pattern used to execute the operation section performance. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation section performance patterns, operation section performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. Light emitting color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and usage are set corresponding to each operation part production pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in the light emission performance included in the operation section performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation section performance pattern shows the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled when the operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern is executed. The application corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the timing at which the operation section performance is executed for each operation section performance pattern.

The operation section performance can be executed at a plurality of timings as the variable display progresses, for example, at the start of preliminary variation, at the start of target variation, at the time of establishing a reach, at the time of development of a reach, and at the time of triggering a win/fail notification. The pre-variation start time is a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation section performance. The start of the target variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of suggestion by the operation section performance. When the reach is established, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display becomes the reach mode. When the reach is developed, the timing corresponds to the case where the development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of the super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies that a super reach performance will be executed after a normal reach performance is executed (development of reach). The win/fail notification inciting time corresponds to the inciting performance before the win/fail notification performance that notifies whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" while executing the super reach reach effect.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 16-2(A), a plurality of operation section effect patterns that can be used to execute operation section effects according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation section performance patterns can be used depending on a plurality of timings at which the operation section performance can be executed.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach effect of normal reach is executed and the reach effect of super reach is not executed. It is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the reach performance of super reach is executed and the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is derived. For the super reach effect, for example, a plurality of reach effects including SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances that have different performance modes from each other. Each reach performance may include a performance with a common performance mode. In order to have jackpot reliability according to each reach effect, the determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" must be set. Bye. Depending on the fluctuation pattern determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of a super reach effect, the presentation mode of the reach effect, etc. It would be nice if it were configurable.

The operation section performance is performed at a predetermined rate depending on whether the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", regardless of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game, including variable displays, such as reach performances, for example. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of Such an operation part performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance is also referred to as a single operation part performance. On the other hand, in some cases, a performance is performed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with a specific performance. A performance using light emission or vibration that accompanies such a specific performance is also referred to as a specific interlocking performance.

FIG. 16-2(B) shows an example of settings when executing a specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect in conjunction with multiple specific effects, such as moving body movement, image display, music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, etc. Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The light emitting color in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is only necessary that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is the same as the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibrations of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking performance are included in the special vibration performance that can be executed along with the execution of the specific performance. The light emission of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emission effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of SP reach A only needs to have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the second jackpot type has the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance regarding the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the termination conditions, or may be a drawing performance regarding the jackpot type that was announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may be a lottery effect regarding whether or not there is a rank increase and the amount of increase resulting in the number of rounds being increased from the number of rounds. As jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that entered the V-winning hole in the V-winning attacker, if it is possible to control the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V-winning attacker is opened or not and the opening time , the number of openings, or the termination condition of probability variable control, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding jackpot game states with different advantages. Based on the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, when it is possible to control from a small winning gaming state to a jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V winning winning attacker is released, the opening time, the number of openings, or, Depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of a V winning prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery performance regarding a small winning gaming state or a jackpot gaming state with different degrees of advantage.

Until the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released is started, it is controlled to a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the gaming state in which the V-winning attacker can be released, the V is caused by the game ball entering the V-winning attacker. During the period until the winning occurs, the controller may be controlled to a strong vibration monitoring state, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. When a V winning prize occurs, the control is performed to a weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is easy to detect vibration errors, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is difficult to detect vibration errors than the strong vibration monitoring state. Control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state during a period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of an alarm image, output of an alarm sound, lighting of an alarm lamp, output of an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality is executable. If a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be brought to a game stop state by the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100 or the like. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor vibrations and to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to notification of a vibration error or game stoppage due to inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 16-3 shows the settings of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance depending on the vibration mode of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. FIG. 16-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation section effects. FIG. 16-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance.

The vibration pattern AKV01 has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV02, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC02, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV03, the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation section performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color.

The vibration pattern AKV11 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is achieved. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation section effects that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes pink.

The vibration pattern AKV12 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes orange.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when a reach is established, a performance based on a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established may be performed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same between the operation part effect executed when a reach is established and the operation part effect executed at the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration mode of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

The vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS1 when the reach develops. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

The vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when the reach is developed, a performance based on a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed may be executed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation part effect executed at the start of pre-variation or target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration mode of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

In the vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period continues further until the player's action of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. I wish I could. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inciting the success or failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be changed depending on the type of effect executed in conjunction with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. good. If a valid detection period is provided, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A should be set to have a light emission mode that switches between golden light (lights on) and non-lights (lights off) every 150 milliseconds to suggest an operation. May be controlled. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the light emitting mode for the vibration effect is such that the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emits gold light continuously over the period of vibration. On the other hand, if a valid detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A be switched every 150 milliseconds between emitting red light (lit) and non-emitting light (lighting out) in a red color different from gold. It may be controlled to have a desired light emitting mode. By executing a light emission effect with a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it can be confirmed that the operation of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers for which lamp control data can be set may be used to give different priorities for light emission control. For example, the first lamp layer has a light emission mode that switches the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A between red light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights out) every 150 milliseconds as a light emission mode for normal operation suggestion. Set the lamp control data. The second lamp layer is set with lamp control data that causes the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds as a light emission mode for suggesting special operations. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is controlled more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Execute with priority. As a result, the light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation may be controlled to be preferentially used as the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect than the light emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation.

The plurality of reach performances that become super reach may include a strong SP reach with relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with relatively low jackpot reliability. In the strong SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is executed after a motion detection performance is executed by detecting a player's motion that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the vibration effect is turned on until the player's movement that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient if the vibration mode has a continuous period. In the weak SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is performed without performing a motion detection performance. When a vibration performance corresponding to such a weak SP reach performance is executed, the vibration pattern AKV31 may be activated at least 1500 milliseconds before the win/fail notification performance. Note that a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different between the operation section performance when the strong SP reach performance is executed and the operation performance when the weak SP reach performance is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to have a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to vibrate every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to be switched between a period and an off period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may also be controlled in a vibration manner. A case may be provided in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed and the operation effect when the weak SP reach effect is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A will be activated to emit a golden light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The light emitting mode may be controlled to switch between (lighting up) and non-lighting (lighting out). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A is continuously activated for 2000 milliseconds by vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The operating lever or push button 31B may be controlled to emit a golden light.

The vibration pattern AKV41 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the screen display in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV43 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to music playback in the reach performance of SP reach A. In the vibration pattern AKV44, the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, the light emitting color in the specific light emitting effect becomes blue as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV42 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance. In the specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV43 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with music playback in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance changes from blue to red to gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 may be a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot confirmation notification, or a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2. There are cases where this happens. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emitted in the specific light emitting effect becomes a rainbow color as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes white as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emitted light color in the specific light emission performance becomes rainbow-colored as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 16-4 shows an example of performing an effect by causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown depending on the emitted light color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have a normal emission brightness set low in the normal emission state, and the emission color is set to a low level. It is sufficient if the light is emitted in a white manner. Alternatively, in the normal light emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to a non-emitting state in which they do not emit light.

A production execution example AKA01 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light. When executing the operation section performance using any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emitted light color becomes white. The operation section performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. Both of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when executing the jackpot type lottery CH1 as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes white.

A production execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light. When executing the operation section effect using either the operation section effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the emitted light color becomes red. The operation section performance pattern AKC02 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The jackpot reliability of both the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC12 is 70% or more. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC02 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section effect based on the operation section pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes red is included.

A production execution example AKA03 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light. When performing the operation section performance using either of the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored. The operation section performance pattern AKC03 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The reliability of the jackpot is 100% for both the operation section performances using the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored.

A production execution example AKA04 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit pink light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the emitted light color becomes pink. The operation section performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit orange light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the emitted light color becomes orange. The operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit blue light. When executing the operation section effect, the emitted light color does not change to blue. When executing the movable body movement of SP Reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes blue. Furthermore, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit gold light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the emitted light color becomes gold. The operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of notification of success or failure. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31. When displaying an image of SP reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes gold. Also, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the light emitting colors of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation section performance, jackpot reliability, and vibration mode in the vibration performance. In addition to the luminous color, arbitrary luminous modes such as luminous time, luminous number (blinking number), luminous cycle (flashing cycle), luminous brightness, etc., can be determined by the execution timing of the operation section performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration in the vibration performance. Depending on the aspect, they may be different or common.

When executed at the start of advance variation, the operation section performance can be executed as a pre-read preview performance or a continuous preview performance. The advance notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance can be executed using continuous performance patterns for each number of pending memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special symbols reserved at the time of starting winnings. As a continuous performance pattern for each number of pending memories, a plurality of continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special symbols stored at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 16-5 shows an example of setting a continuous effect pattern used to execute continuous preview effects. For the continuous performance pattern, for example, a random value for determining the continuous performance pattern is used, a continuous performance pattern determination table is referred to according to the number of reserved memories, and a determined value that matches the random value is assigned according to the winning determination result. The decision may be made by determining the decision result that has been determined.

FIG. 16-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC11 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed.

FIG. 16-5(B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "3". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". When this is the case, the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 16-5(C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "4". In the continuous preview performance using continuous performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3". When the value is "0", the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 16-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the pre-read notice setting process shown in FIG. 16-6, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-read notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables execution of the pre-read notice performance which is a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the production control command (starting opening winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the prefetch notice condition is not satisfied. When a command is received, the content of the notification based on the received command is specified, and the winning determination result is specified as the notification content based on the winning determination result command, for example.

The winning determination result uses the gaming random numbers extracted at the start of winning to determine whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a specific fluctuation pattern. , the result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. The winning determination result may indicate, for example, any one of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmed in case of loss, reach confirmed in case of loss, and general in case of loss. The jackpot winning determination result corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range, and corresponds to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The determination result at the time of winning when the super reach is confirmed in the event of a loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and it corresponds to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the confirmed super reach in the event of a loss. This is the judgment result. The determination result at the time of winning when the reach at the time of loss is confirmed is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determined range at the time of loss. It is. In the case of a loss, the general winning judgment result is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmed range nor within the reach confirmed range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result corresponding to.

It is only necessary that the pre-reading notice condition can be established when the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a losing super reach. In addition, if the current prize winning determination result is either jackpot or loss super reach confirmed, and all previous winning prize determination results corresponding to the pending memory are all loss general. may be possible. Note that if the execution of a pre-read notice performance that is a continuous notice performance has already been set to start, a restriction may be made so that the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied.

If the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-read notice setting process is ended. If the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of a pre-read notice, and referring to the pre-read notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning determination result. Whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect may be determined by determining whether or not to perform a pre-read preview effect. In step AKS102, either "not executed" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is not executed, or "with execution" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is executed is determined. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that "execution is to be performed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-read preview setting process is ended. If it is determined that the pre-read preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous performance pattern, and referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared according to the winning determination result, a continuous performance pattern can be created. may be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After determining the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105, a pre-read preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-read preview setting process is ended. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-read preview flag provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 may be set to an on state.

In such a pre-read notice setting process, if the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a loss-winning super reach, the pre-read notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-read notice execution in step AKS102 can be performed. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence and the continuous performance pattern based on step AKS105. Then, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, even if step AKS102 determines to execute the pre-read preview effect at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a loss and the super reach is confirmed. good. Further, in step AKS105, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate when the winning determination result is a jackpot than when the winning determination result is a loss and super reach is confirmed. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute a continuous preview performance that is a pre-read preview performance based on the winning determination result that is a pre-read determination result.

FIG. 16-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 16-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol etc. that will be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The production control CPU 120 displays the final stop symbol based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. All you have to do is decide. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are mainly performed by setting the command to be sent at the start of the special symbol fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the production control board 12. The variation pattern designation command is a production control command that designates the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a production control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random value for determining the special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents depending on the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (lose)", "reach (lose)", "non-probable variable (jackpot)", and "probable variable (jackpot)". Good to have.

If the variable display content is "Non-reach (lose)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol will not change to the reach state, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a “lose”. If the variable display content is "Reach (Lose)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the "Reach" state, the determined decorative symbol of the Reach Loss combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be "Lose". becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability variable (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a probability variable state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that are the same even numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "probable change (jackpot)", it is sufficient if it is possible to determine a combination of determined ornamental symbols that are the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (lose)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that is a combination that is out of reach is determined as the final stop symbol. If the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be a non-reach (loss) combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining a combination of fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data that is a random number value for determining the symbol, and referring to a symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 according to the variable display contents, What is necessary is to determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern.

After determining the final stop symbol, etc., the operation section performance is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-read preview effect is being executed. For example, if the pre-read preview flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. When the pre-read preview performance is being executed, the remaining number of times may be subtracted by 1, and the operating section performance pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous performance pattern. The continuous effect pattern determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the prefetch notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation section performance and the operation section performance pattern corresponding to the current variable display may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, extract numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part performance, and refer to the operation part performance determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of the operation section performance, that is, whether or not to perform the operation section performance, and the operation section performance pattern used when executing the operation section performance. The operation part effects that are compatible with this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. . Therefore, within the scope of the variable display where the operation part effect included in the pre-read preview effect is executed, the operation part effect corresponding to this variable display has a limit so that it cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. There are restrictions such as:

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with a specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be limited by determining not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, within the scope of the variable display in which the SP reach A reach effect is executed, a limit is set such that all operation section effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established, while it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established. Execution of the operation section performance may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation section performance at the timing corresponding to the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In this case, within the scope of the variable display where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit is set so that some operation part effects cannot be performed while the variable display is being executed. . In addition, within the scope of the variable display in which a specific performance is performed, a limit may be set so that it is difficult for some or all of the operation part performances to be performed while the variable display is being performed. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 that determines the operation section performance in step AKS202 can restrict the execution of the operation section performance including the vibration performance when the special vibration performance is executed.

In addition, in the case where the operation part performance is determined in step AKS202, when a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the winning determination result, etc., the performance will be lower than when the special performance is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation section effects may be set so that some or all of the operation section effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation section performance, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared production control patterns (variable display production control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may select one of the plurality of prepared performance control patterns (operation unit performance control patterns) corresponding to the operation unit performance determined in step AKS202 and set it as the usage pattern. good. Further, for example, an initial value of a performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (performance control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, variations of decorative patterns and the like are started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data included in the production control pattern (variable display production control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of variation, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 16-8 shows a configuration example of the production control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8(A) and an operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8(B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8 (A) executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols in response to the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command. Contains control data used to control the The operating section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8(B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operating section effect.

The variable display production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value, which is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is set in advance. In addition, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, for example, the reception of a predetermined performance control command from the main board 11, or the execution of a predetermined process as a process for controlling the performance operation in the performance control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of production control, etc. may be set in correspondence with predetermined control content or processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects and the like linked to the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating the light emission driving mode of the light emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs during the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's movements, such as a tilting operation on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on the trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and the effective detection period for each operation. It includes data indicating the performance operation mode according to the detection of the player's movement, such as data specifying the control details of the performance operation when the player's movement is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data depending on the content of production operation by each production control pattern. There may be. Further, among the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may be different depending on the content of the production operation executed at each timing. In other words, some process data includes all of display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while others include only a portion of these data. It's fine. Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display production process in step S172 of the production control process process, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. controls performance operations according to various types of corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps, 9, a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a vibration motor 131, a movable body 32, etc.). In addition, in each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and audio control data #1 to audio control are associated with production control process timer judgment values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the production operations in the production device. It composes performance control execution data #1 to performance control execution data #n that indicates the content and specifies the execution of performance control.

The operation section production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation section performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation section performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, for example. In other words, the lamp control data of the operation section performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B is made to emit light in the light emission performance included in the operation section performance. The vibration control data of the operation section presentation control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation section presentation, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131, for example. That is, the vibration control data of the operation section performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance.

FIG. 16-9 shows an example of setting the timing at which the operation section effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the preliminary variation is started, and are timings at which the operation unit performance at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation unit performance is executed in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, depending on the remaining number of times. be able to. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT01, and if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times can be executed. is "1", the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 16-9 corresponds to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that becomes the target variation is started, and is a timing at which the operation unit performance at the start of the target variation can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation part according to the operation part performance pattern according to the remaining number of times is used in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations. After executing the performance, at timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the operation unit performance can be performed using the operation unit performance pattern according to the remaining number of times “0”. Further, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, the operation section effect may become executable. Specifically, when one of the operation section performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. be able to.

Timings such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, which correspond to the case where the variable display of decorative patterns is started, may be such that the operation section performance can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. , the operation section effect may be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbols is started may be any timing that can be reached by starting the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIG. 16-9 are the operation section effects corresponding to the current variable display, including the operation section presentation when a reach is established, the operation section presentation when a reach is developed, and the operation section presentation when a win/fail notification is triggered. Each timing is feasible. For example, depending on the operation section effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach has developed. There are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation part effect, and cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation section effect at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is triggered. Specifically, when either the operation section performance pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Can be done. Furthermore, when either of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. Alternatively, when the operation section performance pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is when the success/failure notification is triggered.

FIG. 16-10 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 16-10(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 16-10(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 16-10(B), the vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 16-10(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is that during the on period of 300 msec, for example, the first brightness of white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low emitting brightness every 30 msec. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 16-11 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 16-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 16-11(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuation. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 16-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 16-11(B). , can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 16-11(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 16-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are continuously displayed in red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect if the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is used. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in red, red-purple, blue-violet, blue, green, yellow, and orange colors that change depending on the elapsed time and the light-emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors. The light emitting position of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified in multiple sections, for example, the upper and lower parts of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and the light emission time, color, and light emission can be specified according to each section. It is sufficient if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 16-12 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 16-12(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 16-12(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 16-12(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 16-12(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is such that during the on period of 1500 ms, for example, the first brightness of the white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 16-13 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 16-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 16-13(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 16-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 16-13(B). , can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 16-13(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 16-13(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that when the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is used, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can emit red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC12 is a light emission mode in which the luminance brightness is changed in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC11. becomes. In this manner, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by varying not only the color of the light emitted but also the period of the light emitted as a display mode of the light emitting effect. Note that during the on-period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light emitting effect, while the light emitting cycle is the same, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by changing the light emitting color. In this way, for example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effect are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making the light emitting period common.

FIG. 16-14 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21. The operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC21 can be executed at timing AKT12 when the reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR1 which is the performance when the reach is established as shown in FIG. 16-14 (A). It includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color is pink as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 16-14(C). The performance AKR1, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. As shown in FIG. 16-14(C), the vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated multiple times at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 16-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off.

FIG. 16-15 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22. The operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR2 which is a performance when a reach is established as shown in FIG. 16-15 (A), This includes a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color is orange as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV12 as shown in FIG. 16-15(C). The performance AKR2, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. It is sufficient that the performance mode is different between the performance AKR1 and the performance AKR2, which are the performance when the reach is established. As shown in Figure 16-15 (C), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating the vibration twice alternately, a vibration mode including an on period of a second vibration on time (for example, 250 milliseconds) and an on period of a third vibration on time (for example, 500 milliseconds) is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16-15(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. Furthermore, when the on-periods of the vibration effects are different, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be made different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit light in orange. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit light in orange. The lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, in correspondence with the performances AKS1 and AKS2 that are the effects at the time of reach development, and the emission color is white. , vibration effects using vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS1. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2. Regarding the light emitting effects accompanying these vibration effects, in both of the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effects.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the success/failure agitation performance at timing AKT14, which is the time of the success/failure notification agitation, and includes a light emitting performance in which the emitted light color is gold, and a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV31 has a vibration mode in which the on period is 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in Figures 16-12 and 16-13, among the operation effects that can be performed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission color of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted light color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored. In this case, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white in accordance with the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm here. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13, which is when the reach is developed, include the operation part effects using the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. Contains things that In this way, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, have the same luminescent color, white, and the vibration effect. A case is provided in which the vibration mode of is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that it is possible to use operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute light emission effects in which the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colors, such as operation unit effects using the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, and the vibration effect The vibration mode may also be different. As in the case where the emitted light color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different. Contains things that are common. In addition, as in the case where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the emission color The display may include different lighting modes. The operation section performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not need to include a light emission mode that is different from the operation section performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operation section performances have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing for inciting the success or failure notification, include the operation section effect using the operation section effect pattern AKC41, which executes a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes golden along with the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm here. This operation section performance has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is common at 100% between the operation part performance executed at timing AKT12 when reach is established and the operation part performance performed at timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is triggered, and the vibration performance A case is provided in which the vibration mode of is different. Furthermore, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT14 when a win/fail notification is triggered have different luminescent colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effect. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the jackpot reliability is the same, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so the stick controller 31A It is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using operating members such as and push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target change starts are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, and the emitted light color changes to white, red, or rainbow colors due to the vibration effects based on the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. It includes something that executes a light-emitting effect. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, and the vibration effect of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the aspects are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately varied. This can improve the game's interest.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation section effects that can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the values are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game.

The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, the reliability of the jackpot is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing at which the vibration performance is executed. Furthermore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration production includes the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity due to the drive of the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong vibration and weak vibration in the vibration intensity, etc. , it is only necessary that the vibration patterns for vibrating the operating members such as the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made different.

The plurality of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body movement, image display, music playback, jackpot confirmation notification, and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the SP reach A reach performance. For example, the reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration effect is executed by the operation part effect, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher. Become. The movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the SP reach A reach effect are all executed as part of the reach effect, so they do not individually have jackpot reliability. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect that definitely informs that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. Jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to SP Reach A's reach effect in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. This is different from a performance that has a high reliability of hitting a jackpot. In this way, among a plurality of specific performances, for a specific performance that has jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability will be higher if the vibration effect by the operation part effect is executed than if the specific effect is executed. It is sufficient if it is set as follows. Further, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIG. 16-16 shows an example of performing an effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown depending on the execution mode of the performance using light emission.

Effect execution example AKF01 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit white light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is white. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the color of the emitted light becomes red along with a vibration effect.

Effect execution example AKF02 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit red light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored along with a vibration effect.

In the production execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed to the background display. At the same time, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operation section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to any of the operation section effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect.

Effect execution example AKF04 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit blue light that matches the character display when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to any of the operation section effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect.

For example, a predetermined effect by displaying a background display, character display, or any other effect image on the image display device 5 can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, including variable display of decorative symbols. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. There is. When an operation section effect is executed while such a predetermined effect is being executed, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to be controlled by a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect. It is possible to emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the operation part performance is controlled using the control data read from the operation part performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. This control data includes lamp control data that controls the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data that controls the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to such a light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation section effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. It is. In this way, by making the light emission mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, the light emission can be made different. It is possible to appropriately diversify the presentation and improve the interest in the game.

In addition to or in place of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, while causing the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit light in a color that matches the audio output such as BGM, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light may be emitted in the color of the light emitting effect in the part effect. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output audio that is a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light in accordance with the audio output. On the other hand, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. Even in this case, by making the light emission mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, , it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using light emission and improve game interest. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, right frame lamp 9N, etc. You can also use it as When this predetermined effect is executed, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by a vibration effect in the operation section effect. By executing the operation part effect while executing such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased for the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 16-17 shows an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movable body movement in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in conjunction with the image display in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ02 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold along with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with music playback in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emitting color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to red to gold due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in response to the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emitted from the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow-colored in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification includes stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative pattern, displaying a production image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach production, the speaker 8L, Any method that allows the player to recognize the jackpot by outputting a notification sound that confirms the jackpot with 8R, lighting up the jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the notification is to be executed.

It should be noted that, following the operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is triggered, a specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ04 accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification may be performed. In this case, by executing a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with jackpot confirmation notification while the player's expectation is heightened by the operation section performance, it is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the interest in the game. When performing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation section effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect may be different between the operation section effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emitting effect or specific light emitting effect may be different. The light emission mode may also be made different. For example, the vibration intensity may be made different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission brightness may be made different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By varying the vibration mode and light emitting mode to give a sharp presentation, it is possible to easily distinguish between the operation section presentation and the specific interlocking presentation, thereby appropriately diversifying the presentation and improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is a specific light emission in which when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the light emission color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes white due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes performance. A specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow-colored due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light-emitting effects.

FIGS. 16-18 to 16-20 show the case where SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIG. 16-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body motion in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 16-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when the image display in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 16-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach performance.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode and the normal ready-to-reach presentation is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach performance of SP reach A is started due to reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, and the movable body movement is performed as in the performance execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position, and at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32, "SP An effect image showing a message such as "Reach A" is displayed. Thereafter, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the production execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is..." is displayed.

With the change in the position of the movable body 32 resulting in movable body movements such as performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in Figure 16-17. , contains. Furthermore, when the position change of the movable body 32 continues and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the production execution example AKG03, the specific linked production in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end with respect to the initial position of the display screen is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated during this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the lever or push button 31B is vibrated. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration performance may be performed in a vibration manner in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched every 250 milliseconds between an on period in which the stick controller vibrates and an off period in which it does not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emits blue light over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between blue light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights off) every 250 milliseconds. Good too.

When the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A such as production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the position of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N is changed, for example. The light may be emitted in a light emitting pattern in which the emitted light color and emitted light brightness gradually change from the bottom to the top. For example, in the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the emitted light color changes to blue, and the emitted light brightness changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time. All you have to do is emit light.

After the movable body movement is completed as in the performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as an image display in the SP reach A reach performance as in the performance execution example AKG11. At this time, for example, text indicating the message "Super Hot" is displayed in gold. Further, as in the production execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Along with the display of performance images such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific linked performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed along with the image display in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect with a vibration pattern AKV42, a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes gold, and Contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of a performance image in a reach performance different from the text display starts, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific linked performance in period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Very Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and during this period AKZ02, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated. A special vibration effect may be executed in a different manner. In addition, during the period AKZ02, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is set to a light emitting mode that alternately repeats the first brightness, which has a high golden light emitting brightness, and the second brightness, which has a low light emitting brightness, every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A like effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. It is sufficient that the emitted light color is gold in accordance with the image display and the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, as the effect images are displayed as in the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N change to gold color, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image starts, it is sufficient to emit light in a color different from gold.

After the display of the performance image as in the performance execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is outputted by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the performance execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach performance of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in production execution example AKG22, the speakers 8L and 8R output the audio of the music phrase PH02. Thereafter, as in production execution example AKG23, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to perform the entire music playback in the SP reach A reach performance by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the performance.

In accordance with the output of the sound that plays music such as the performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking performance that is executed with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A is a special vibration performance with a vibration pattern AKV43, a change in the light emitting color from blue to red, and It includes a specific light emitting effect that changes from red to gold. In the production execution example AKG21, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. In the production execution example AKG23, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of a plurality of musical phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output as the effect progresses.

FIG. 16-21 shows a music reproduction execution example AKH01 in which the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21 (A), during the period AKZ03 during which the specific interlocking effect can be executed as the music is played, each of C, R, E, F, G, A, C, and C is displayed. Sounds corresponding to the musical scale are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the C scale that is output last may be one octave higher than the C scale that is output first.

Such specific interlocking effects that accompany music playback include a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color changes as shown in Figure 16-21 (B), and a special light emission effect that uses a vibration pattern as shown in Figure 16-21 (C). It includes a vibration performance, which is a vibration performance, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 16-21(C) has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated a plurality of times in accordance with the output period of the audio corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 16-21(B), the specific light emitting effect accompanying this special vibration effect is performed using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The emitted light color changes sequentially from blue to red to gold. During the stop period of the audio output and the off period of the special vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. Note that during the audio output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be made different for each scale. For example, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is made to emit blue light continuously over a period of time during which the first C scale is output. Next, during a certain period of the scale of ``R'', the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first brightness with a high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness. Thereafter, during a certain period of the Mi scale, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light in a light emitting mode that switches between golden light emitting (lighting up) and non-emitting light (lighting out). In this way, by providing a light emitting mode in which the amount of light emitted differs depending on the color of light corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects and improve the interest in the game.

The reach effect of SP reach A is executable controlled by using control data read from the variable display effect control pattern in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 16-8 (A) uses lamp control data and vibration control data to perform specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A. It is set to be able to execute specific linked effects. In the specific interlocking effect, it is possible to execute a special vibration effect using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance using any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance using the vibration pattern in the operation section performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation section performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance, so that the stick controller 31A and It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

When performing the operation section effect, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light using the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, along with the vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When performing a specific interlocking effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are used to vibrate the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, along with a special vibration effect that vibrates the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emitting effect that causes light to emit light is executed. By executing an effect that includes vibration and light emission of the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, the player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can enjoy the image display. By recognizing the vibrations and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the performance can be increased.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 16-17, with the movement of the movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to perform the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the game's interest.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 16-17, in response to the jackpot confirmation notification, a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to notification that the jackpot game state is being controlled, it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B, thereby improving the game's interest. be able to.

The specific interlocking performance includes a specific light emission performance in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in conjunction with the special vibration performance based on any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emitting performance accompanying the vibration performance in the operation section performance and the specific light emission performance accompanying the special vibration performance in the specific interlocking performance are different in light emitting manner such as emitted light color. In this way, by changing the light emission mode depending on the operation section performance and the specific interlocking performance, the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Can be done.

As shown in Figures 16-10 and 16-11, among the operation effects that can be performed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emitted color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow color. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 16-12 and 16-13, among the operation effects that can be performed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission color of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow-colored. A vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing to be executed is different between the vibration effects of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the vibration effects of the operation part effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. In addition to being different, the vibration modes are also different. In addition, the emitted light color is white and red for the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the preliminary variation, and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect, which can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. By being one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, by providing a case in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different while the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is common when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, operations such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be performed. The interest in the game can be improved by appropriately diversifying the performances using the members.

The vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary variation, is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning judgment result, which is the pre-read judgment result. Executed in the variable display before the variable display to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit performances are executed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 16-10 and 16-11, among the operation effects that can be performed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emitted color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow color. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance is an operation part performance pattern in which the light emitting color differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than "0" or when the remaining number of times is "0". There are some that include. For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 16-5(A) is the operation section performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and the operation section performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect of the operation element effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target change starts. The light emission mode differs between the two. In this way, by providing cases in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. is set to prevent it from becoming inferior. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 16-5(A), if the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This is set to prevent the operation section performance pattern AKC11 from occurring. If the operation part performance pattern is AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern AKC11 or the operation part performance pattern AKC12 will be used as the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation section effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later, such as at the start of the target variation, even though the operation section effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the preliminary variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-10 and 16-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is Including cases where the emitted light is white, and cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color different from white, when the emitted light color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period and off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-emission are repeated, and when the emitted light color becomes red, it emits light continuously in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in Figures 16-12 and 16-13, among the operation effects that can be performed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission color of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is different from white, such as red or rainbow color, and when the emitted color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and the emitted light color becomes red. In this case, the light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 have different on-period settings, the light emission modes such as the light emission period in the light emission effects will differ. Even in this case, it is only necessary to provide a case where the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation section effect is different.

(Modified examples of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation part performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1, etc.

Regarding the operation part effects, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, regarding the operation part performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous level regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages.

If the timing of executing the operation part effect is different or the same, if the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different or the same, or if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different or the same, the jackpot reliability will be Combinations in each case, such as different cases and common cases, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing of execution is different or the same for the operation part effect and the specific linked effect, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect is different or the same, the light emission mode of the light emission effect or specific light emission effect. The combinations in each case, such as when the numbers are different and when they are the same, can be arbitrarily set depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by making the light emission modes of the light emission effects common. When the light emission modes of the light emission effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common. When some vibration modes in the vibration effects are different, it is only necessary to reduce the control burden of the vibration effects by making other vibration modes in the vibration effects common. For example, when the vibration intensities of the vibration performances are different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the vibration performances can be reduced by making the vibration periods of the vibration performances common. When some light emitting modes in a light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient if the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect common. For example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effects are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effects can be reduced by making the light emitting cycle common in the light emitting effects. It is sufficient if the control burden can be reduced by similarly standardizing the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to or instead of executing the variable display, when the game is controlled to be in any game state such as a small win game state or a jackpot game state, the operation section performance or specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when the game is controlled to be a small winning game state, a predetermined percentage is determined depending on whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times the player is opened, or the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of the V winning attacker. It may also be possible to perform the operation section performance with. When controlled in a jackpot gaming state, the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the jackpot gaming state ends, the termination conditions, and the rank-up that will result in an increased number of rounds than the number of rounds announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may also be possible to perform the operation section effect at a predetermined rate depending on the presence or absence, amount of increase, etc. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with a specific performance, such as movable object movement, image display, and music playback in a small winning game state or a jackpot gaming state.

The specific performance that can be executed as a specific interlocking performance may be any performance that can be executed depending on the execution of the variable display, or may be any performance that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, if a variable display result at a predetermined rate becomes a "jackpot" and a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, a certain It may also be possible to perform linked effects.

When controlled to an arbitrary performance state, an operation section performance or a specific interlocking performance may be made executable. For example, when the production state is controlled to be a special production mode, the operation part production or specific linked production is performed at a higher rate than when the production state is controlled to a production state that is a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operating member capable of performing effects using vibrations or light emission may be any motion detecting member configured to be able to detect the player's motion. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a contact operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Furthermore, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by a player may be used, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. The player's actions may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands or the like using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such a motion detection member, a contact member that can be touched by a player's hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation section effects can correspond to the vibration effects in the feature part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effects in the feature part 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation section effects, the vibration effects included in the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the pre-variation start times, can correspond to the first vibration effects in the characteristic section 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic unit 50AK. The light emitting effects included in the operation part effects include a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the feature part 48AK, a light emitting effect accompanying a predetermined vibration effect in the feature part 49AK, and a light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Compatible with light emitting effects. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, are the light emitting effects associated with the first vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. Can be adapted to performances. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, are the light emitting effects associated with the second vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. I can handle it. The special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance can correspond to the special vibration performance in the feature section 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed through the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 operates. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base state) can be achieved without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. ).

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the winning symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for small winning symbols, a random number for jackpot lottery determination, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols, such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, when drawing time-saving symbols using structures, when the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number is used for the lottery. . However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not selected, this may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

In addition, a drawing lottery for the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means that is accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that emits light. The rate at which the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed. The aspects are different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, it is possible to win a jackpot depending on the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be something like reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, as long as it is the emission color and vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation section effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode, The vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when they are executed. The aspects may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may also be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the advanced effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means It may also be possible to perform the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a vibration production that can perform a predetermined vibration production and a special vibration production as a vibration production in which the operation means vibrates. The predetermined vibration effect includes an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect in which the operating means emits light in accordance with a predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of the game. The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when a predetermined vibration effect is executed than when it is not executed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the situation, and the vibration performance execution means can execute a special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of a specific performance, and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. Bye. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific performance may be, for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed depends on, for example, the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be anything such as jackpot reliability. The fact that the special vibration performance can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration performance during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when an advanced performance is executed after the variable display becomes a ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when a notification performance is executed to notify whether or not the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emitting mode may be a case where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color, for example. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to be advantageous may be common as long as the jackpot reliability is 100%, for example. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready mode may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing or the second timing. It may also be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance before the predetermined vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach effect is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

The specific performance execution means may be able to execute a performance that causes the movable member to operate as the specific performance, and the vibration performance execution unit may be capable of executing a special vibration performance during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration performance in response to notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot confirmation notification. The special vibration effect accompanying this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The light emitting effect execution means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emission mode is different between the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect accompanying the special vibration effect. Good too. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission mode may be different, for example, if the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from the case where the light emission color is blue, gold, or changes from blue to gold through red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects and improve the game's interest.

When the special vibration performance is executed, a restriction means for restricting the execution of the predetermined vibration performance may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 when determining the operation section performance in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and is capable of performing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. The apparatus includes a vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance that causes the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the vibration performance, and when the vibration performance is performed, the vibration performance is better than when the vibration performance is not performed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance, and the timing at which the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance are executed is different. are different, and the vibration modes are different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect may be different, for example, as long as it is the jackpot reliability depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be performed at different timings, for example, as long as the preliminary fluctuation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 are different from the target fluctuation start timing AKT11. The vibration mode may be different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect is, for example, when the light emission color included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow color. etc. is fine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 of starting the target variation.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is controlled to be in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is different from the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in one light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emitting mode may be a case where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is changed by the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display starts, and the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. They are common, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the notification performance is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect depending on the timing.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, and the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Good too. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may also be possible to emit light. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the second vibration performance can be executed in a common vibration manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance performance execution means It may be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance at one timing and before the second vibration performance is performed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration performance in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration performance is executed, based on the pre-read determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage may be, for example, a variable display that is a prior change.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration which is different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emission mode during the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The light emitting mode during the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the emitted light color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode is different because, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" depending on the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation part effect pattern is different from when the remaining number of times is "0". Good to have.
In such a configuration, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual feature parts that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other feature parts, as appropriate.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 9B1 Lever lamp 9B2 Button lamp 9C Upper frame lamp 9M Left frame lamp 9N Right frame lamp 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 100 For game control Microcomputer 120 CPU for performance control
131 Vibration motor 75SG001 Pachinko game machine 300 First presentation unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 Second presentation unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decoration section 600 Third presentation unit 800 Fourth presentation Unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player ,
an operation means that can be operated by a player ;
A production control means capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled,
A specific performance can be executed after starting the reach performance,
The operating means is operated at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed, and a second timing before the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed. It is possible to perform a predetermined vibration production that vibrates,
It is possible to execute a special vibration performance in which the operating means is vibrated during a specific performance period that is an execution period of the specific performance,
The special vibration performance can be performed at a third timing during the specific performance period and at a fourth timing after the third timing during the specific performance period,
As the special vibration performance,
A first special vibration performance that corresponds to the operation of a performance movable body different from the operation means can be executed during the specific performance period,
A second special vibration performance corresponding to the image display can be executed during the specific performance period,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
The predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance include a first performance mode and a second performance mode as common performance modes,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the first timing, the rate at which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher when it is executed in the second effect mode than when it is executed in the first effect mode. is high,
When the special vibration effect is executed at the third timing, the rate at which the special vibration effect is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher when executed in the second effect mode than when executed in the first effect mode. is high,
It is more advantageous when the predetermined vibration effect is executed in the first effect mode at the first timing than when the special vibration effect is executed in the second effect mode at the third timing. It is highly controlled by the state;
The performance mode of the special vibration performance is a performance mode different from the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and includes a specific performance mode in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is a specific ratio,
The ratio at which each of the presentation mode when the special vibration presentation is executed at the third timing and the presentation mode when the special vibration presentation is executed at the fourth timing is controlled to the advantageous state. Even if is a performance mode lower than the specific ratio, if the combination of each performance mode is a specific combination, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state becomes the specific ratio,
The predetermined vibration performance and the first special vibration performance are different in form ,
The predetermined vibration performance and the second special vibration performance are different in form ,
The first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance have different aspects ,
A gaming machine characterized by :

Images